Kyocera TASKalfa 3500i Service Manual Download Page 394 | Manualshive

Page: 394 / 837

background image

2LL/2LJ/2LH

1-4-90

(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission

Error code

Description

U01000

An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.

U01001

Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.

U01016

An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an
EOM signal, and T1 timeout was detected.

U01019

No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).

U01020

No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01021

No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01022

No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

U01028

T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).

U01052

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).

U01080

A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.

U01092

During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impos-
sible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.

U01093

A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.

U01094

The preset number of command retransfers for DCS/NSS signals was exceeded during
phase B of transmission.

U01095

No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS (Q) signal during phase D of
transmission, and the preset number of command transfers was exceeded.

U01096

A DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase D of transmission.

U01097

The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR
signal or no response.

«
...
392
393
394
395
396
...
»

Summary of Contents for TASKalfa 3500i

Page 1: ...SERVICE MANUAL Published in September 2011 842LH112 2LHSM062 Rev 2 TASKalfa 3500i TASKalfa 4500i TASKalfa 5500i ...

Page 2: ...ficials for details in your area for proper disposal ATTENTION IL Y A UN RISQUE D EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d égout municipales Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchet...

Page 3: ... 3 156 1 3 158 1 3 159 1 3 161 1 3 171 1 3 173 1 3 175 1 3 176 1 3 178 1 4 3 1 4 5 1 4 7 to 1 4 16 1 4 20 1 4 21 1 4 23 to 1 4 30 1 4 32 to 1 4 39 1 4 42 to 1 4 44 1 4 47 1 4 48 1 4 52 to 1 4 55 1 4 57 1 4 58 1 4 60 1 4 62 1 4 64 to 1 4 66 1 4 68 1 4 70 to 1 4 78 1 4 81 to 1 4 85 1 5 6 1 5 9 1 5 10 1 5 22 to 1 5 25 1 5 27 1 5 29 1 5 30 1 5 32 1 5 36 to 1 5 38 1 5 41 1 5 43 1 5 46 to 1 5 48 1 5 62 ...

Page 4: ...This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 5: ...rsonnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities ...

Page 6: ... this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com pliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol General warning Warning of risk of electric shock Warning of high temperature indicates a prohibited...

Page 7: ...d or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may cause fire Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct ...

Page 8: ... carefully Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may damage eyesight Handle the charger section...

Page 9: ... caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solve...

Page 10: ...This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 11: ...n 1 2 70 1 2 10 Installing the keyboard holder option 1 2 76 1 2 11 Installing the handset option for japan only 1 2 83 1 Installing directly on the device 1 2 83 2 Mounting on the document table 1 2 90 1 3 Maintenance Mode 1 3 1 Maintenance mode 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance item 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item list 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items 1 3 9 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 P...

Page 12: ...or code table Page transmission error 1 4 89 2 4 U009XX error code table Page reception error 1 4 89 2 5 U010XX error code table G3 transmission 1 4 90 2 6 U011XX error code table G3 reception 1 4 91 2 7 U017XX error code table V 34 transmission 1 4 92 2 8 U018XX error code table V 34 reception 1 4 92 1 5 Assembly and disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 5 1 1 Precautions 1...

Page 13: ...developer drive unit 1 5 63 3 Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit and feed drive unit 1 5 64 4 Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2 1 5 70 1 5 9 Others 1 5 71 1 Detaching the eject filter 1 5 71 2 Detaching and refitting the toner filter 1 5 72 3 Detaching and refitting the left filter 1 5 73 4 Detaching and refitting the belt filter 1 5 74 5 Detaching and refitting the LSU filt...

Page 14: ...ront PWB 2 3 43 2 3 7 Feed PWB 1 2 3 49 2 3 8 Feed PWB 2 2 3 59 2 3 9 Relay PWB 2 3 65 2 3 10 LSU relay PWB 2 3 71 2 4 Appendixes 2 4 1 Appendixes 2 4 1 1 List of maintenance parts 2 4 1 2 Maintenance kits 2 4 3 3 Periodic maintenance procedures 2 4 4 4 Repetitive defects gauge 2 4 8 5 Firmware environment commands 2 4 9 6 Chart of image adjustment procedures 2 4 15 7 Wiring diagram 2 4 17 INSTALL...

Page 15: ...K 16K 16KR MP tray A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 ISO B5 B5R A5R B6R A6R Return postcard Postcards Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Ledger Legal Letter LetterR ExecutiveR StatementR Oficio II 12 18 Folio 8K 16K 16KR Custom Zoom level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Copying ...

Page 16: ...n developing system Developer 2 component Toner replenishing Automatic from the toner container and toner hopper Transfer system Transfer belt and roller Separation system Small diameter separation Cleaning system Counter blade Cleaning roller Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp LED Fusing system Heat roller fusing Heat source Halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devi...

Page 17: ...er Large capacity feeder Side deck 1000 sheet finisher 4000 sheet finisher Center folding unit Mailbox Punch unit Inner job separator Right job separator Key counter Fax kit Expansion memory Internet fax kit A Data security kit Printed document guard kit Emulation option kit Gigabit ethernet board Document table IC card reader holder and keyboard holder Item Specifications Printing speed Same as c...

Page 18: ...uirements CPU 600 MHz or higher RAM 128 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 100 dpi 200 400 dpi File format TIFF JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning speed A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo orig inal 1 Simplex B W 80 images min Color 50 images min Duplex B W 160 images min Color 80 images min Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000...

Page 19: ... size indicator plate 2 Slit glass 3 Toner container 4 Platen Contact glass 5 Clip holder 6 Operation panel 7 Handles 8 Release button 9 Waste toner box 10 Waste toner tray 11 Front cover 12 Toner container release lever 13 Network interface connector 14 USB port 15 USB interface connector 16 Option interface ...

Page 20: ...20 USB port 21 Cassettes 22 Paper length guide 23 Guide lock lever 24 Paper width guide 25 Paper width adjusting tab 26 Paper conveying unit 27 Paper conveying unit lever 28 Duplex cover lever 29 Duplex cover 30 MP paper width guide 31 MP support Tray 32 MP Multi Purpose tray 33 Paper conveying cover lever 34 Paper conveying cover 35 Handle 36 Main power switch ...

Page 21: ...e 1 1 3 2 4 3 9 5 6 10 7 8 1 1 Machine 2 Document processor dual scan DP 3 Document processor reversed DP 4 Paper feeder 5 Large capacity feeder 6 Side deck 7 1000 sheet finisher 8 4000 sheet finisher 9 Center folding unit 10 Mailbox ...

Page 22: ...ay key 5 Help key 6 Quick no search key 7 Clear key 8 Reset key 9 System menu key 10 Power key 11 Counter key 12 Main power indicator 13 Application key 14 Document box key 15 Send key 16 FAX key 17 Processing indicator 18 Numeric keys 19 Memory indicator 20 Enter key 21 Attention indicator 22 Start key 23 Stop key 24 Interrupt key 25 Authentication Logout key 26 Energy saver key Option ...

Page 23: ...4 Paper path 1 Cassette paper feed section 2 MP tray paper feed section 3 Paper conveying section 4 Optical section 5 Laser scanner unit 6 Drum unit 7 Developer unit 8 Toner container section 9 Transfer Separation sections 10 Fuser section 11 Eject Feed shift sections 12 Duplex section ...

Page 24: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 10 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 25: ...erature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mercury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based ...

Page 26: ...Installing the toner containers Unlocking the developer waste exit Installing toner Print out the user setting list Make test copies Connect the power cord Installing other optional devices Replacing operation panel sheet Exit maintenance mode Installing the original platen or DP option Setting the delivery date maintenance item U278 Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Installing the...

Page 27: ...LJ 2LH 1 2 3 Moving the machine When moving the machine pull out three carrying handles and move with carrying handles and the hand hold Figure 1 2 2 Carrying handle Carrying handle Carrying handle Handhold ...

Page 28: ...se 3 Inner case 4 Top pad 5 Skid 6 Bottom sheet 7 Bottom pad 8 Bottom front left pad 9 Bottom front right pad 10 Bottom rear left pad 11 Bottom rear right pad 12 Rear pad 13 Machine cover 14 Document tray 15 Power cord 16 Plastic bag 17 Paper size plates 18 Paper media plates 19 Operation panel sheets 20 Operation guide etc 21 Eject spacer 22 Barcode label 23 Hinge joints ...

Page 29: ...ve the ISU lock leaflet 2 Remove three tapes and then remove two A3 papers 3 Remove seven tapes and then remove three protect sheets Figure 1 2 5 Removing the eject spacer Eject spacer Silica gel Removing the tapes Tape Tape Tape Tape A3 papers Tapes Tape Tape Protect sheet Protect sheet Protect sheet Tapes Tape ISU lock leaflet ...

Page 30: ... paper feeder or large capacity feeder as necessary 2 Verify levelness at the four corners of the contact glass using a level gauge and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness Tapes Tapes Tape Tape Tape Tape Installing the paper feeder option ...

Page 31: ...r lock cover 2 Mount the scanner lock cover in the reverse manner to restore in the original location Unless unlocking is performed C3100 is caused Figure 1 2 7 Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Scanner lock cover Locked Released ...

Page 32: ... the storage location When moving the machine attach the lift plate in original position Figure 1 2 8 1 Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length guide and move the guide to fit the length of the paper Figure 1 2 9 Release of lift plate stopper Lift plate stopper Cassette Loading paper Paper length guide ...

Page 33: ...t the right side of the cassette Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicated Make sure that the paper length guide and the paper width guides are correctly abut with the paper Be sure to remove spaces between the guides and the paper Figure 1 2 11 Guide lock lever Paper width adjusting tab paper width guides Pape...

Page 34: ...5 Press the guide lock lever to lock Figure 1 2 12 6 Fold the paper size plate and the paper media plate in two and insert 7 Gently push the cassette back in Figure 1 2 13 Guide lock lever Paper media plate Paper size plate ...

Page 35: ...her end is up and hit in the same way 3 Shake the toner container in a wide ver tical curve like motion about 5 times Figure 1 2 14 4 Install the toner container 5 Turn down the toner container release lever to lock the toner container Figure 1 2 15 Installing the toner containers Toner container Toner container Toner container Toner container release lever ...

Page 36: ... in place the developer in the developer unit may clog at the outlet causing a damage to the developer unit 1 Remove the tape and then remove the set up leaflet The setup leaflet must be affixed in posi tion before dispatching the machine 2 Press the fixing pin and rotate Fully insert the fixing pin with keeping the protrusions vertical and rotate it by 90 degrees clockwise Make sure that the prot...

Page 37: ... or removed use the reverse procedure to lock in the developer waste exit Failure to observe this caution could result in deteriorated print quality and or C call 7460 Figure 1 2 17 1 Insert a flat head screwdriver and slide the operation panel covers A and B to remove them Figure 1 2 18 Screw Lever 1 2 Screw Lever 3 Locked Released Replacing operation panel sheet Operation panel cover A Operation...

Page 38: ...ponding language 5 Refit the clear panel 6 Refit the operation panel covers A and B Figure 1 2 20 1 Install optional original platen or DP 1 Install the optional devices job separa tor document finisher and or fax kit etc as necessary Clear panel Operation panel sheet Installing the original platen or DP option Installing other optional devices ...

Page 39: ...hen completed press OK 2 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 138 Load the cassette with multiple sheets of A4 or Letter paper Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter 410 using the numeric keys and press the start key Press Normal Mode and then press the start key A test patterns 1 and 2 are outputted Place the output test pattern 1 as the original...

Page 40: ...elect Maintenance and press the start key A status report is output 3 Press the stop key to exit 1 Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode 1 Select Report Print to output the user various setting reports 1 Place an original and make test copies Setting the delivery date maintenance item U278 Output an own status report maintenance item U000 E...

Page 41: ... single counts DBL A3 Ledger U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U285 Setting service status page On U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning On U325 Setting the paper interval Off 1 U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On 8 U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Off ...

Page 42: ...ocket assembly 1 3029236241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTPB4010TW R M3 x 6 bronze flat head screw 2 7BB003306H M4 x 20 tap tight S screw...

Page 43: ...unt to the key counter cover using two screws 4 Fit the key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws Figure 1 2 21 5 Pull the paper conveying unit out 6 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 7 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 22 M3 x 6 flat head screws Key counter mount Key counter cover M4 x 6 screw M4 x 6 screw Key...

Page 44: ...Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers Figure 1 2 23 9 Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 24 Right upper cover Aperture Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws ...

Page 45: ...d then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 2 25 13 Release seven wire saddles on the con troller box 14 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 2 26 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddles Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 46: ... figure a When connecting an FFC furnished with the protrusions at both ends address the side with a blue colored tape towards the locking lever insert the FFC into the con nector until the protrusions are recessed and raise the lock lever to lock the FFC see figure b Figure 1 2 27 Controller box State of lock Lock release FFC detaching Main PWB Main PWB FFC connection Lock a b 1 Lock lever Lock l...

Page 47: ...k two hooks and then remove the controller box Figure 1 2 28 18 Connect the connector of the key coun ter wire to the connector YC24 on the engine PWB Figure 1 2 29 Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw Controller box Engine PWB Key counter wire YC24 Engine PWB ...

Page 48: ...se three wire saddles 22 Remove the wire holder 23 Route the key counter wire through the three wire saddles and wire guide and fix it at the wire holder 24 Refit the controller box 25 Refit the left upper cover and the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 31 Wire holders Wire guide key counter wire Wire holder Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire guide key counter wire ...

Page 49: ...Insert the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture of the right upper cover 28 Fit the key counter cover retainer using the two M4 x 20 screws Figure 1 2 33 M4 nuts Right upper cover Right upper cover Aperture Key counter cover retainer M4 x 20 screw M4 x 20 screw Projection ...

Page 50: ...sert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly 36 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 37 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page 1 3 95 38 Exit the maintenance mode 39 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 40 Check that the counter counts up as copies...

Page 51: ...y 1 3029236241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTPB4010TW R M3 x 6 bronze flat head screw 2 7BB003306H M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB100420H...

Page 52: ...1902H70UN1 Sheet x1 is not used Parts Quantity Part No Tray stay 1 Tray mount 1 Tray cover 1 302LC04600 Tray lower cover 1 302LC04710 Tray retainer 1 Sheet 2 302LC04660 Pin 2 303NS24410 M4 nut 2 3CY06030 M4 x 8 screw 7 7BB180408H M4 x 14 screw 2 7BB607414H ...

Page 53: ...unt two M4 nuts at the back of the right upper cover 3 Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 36 M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 x 14 screw Tray stay M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 nut ...

Page 54: ...t job separator has been installed Figure 1 2 37 5 Pass the connector of the key counter wire through the aperture in the right upper cover 6 Refit the right upper cover 7 Refit the ISU right cover 8 Close the paper conveying unit Figure 1 2 38 Tray retainer Tray retainer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw Right upper cover Screw Key counter wire Aperture ...

Page 55: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 2 31 9 Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 39 M4 x 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount M4 x 8 screw ...

Page 56: ...tray cover to the tray stay using four M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 40 12 Fit the key counter cover retainer using two M4 x 20 tap tight S screws Figure 1 2 41 M4 x 8 screws Aperture Tray cover Tray cover M4 x 8 screws Key counter cover retainer M4 x 20 tap tight S screw M4 x 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 57: ...n the document table 14 Fit the key counter cover to the docu ment table using the M4 x 6 screw 15 Connect the key counter signal cable to the key counter wire Figure 1 2 42 Aperture Key counter cover Key counter signal cable Key counter signal cable Key counter wire M4 x 6 screw ...

Page 58: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 2 34 16 Fit the tray lower cover Install the key counter signal cable and key counter wire so that they are held behind the tray lower cover Figure 1 2 43 Tray lower cover Connector ...

Page 59: ...rn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 21 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page 1 3 95 22 Exit the maintenance mode 23 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 24 Check that the counter counts up as copies are made Figure 1 2 45 Pin Tray lower cover Pin Sheet Document...

Page 60: ...not used Parts Quantity Part No Key card MK 2 1 8J272002 option MK 2 mount 1 Supplied with MK 2 M4 x 16 screw 2 Document table 1 1902H70UN1 option M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB100420H Parts Quantity Part No Tray stay 1 Tray mount 1 Tray cover 1 302LC04600 Tray lower cover 1 302LC04710 Tray retainer 1 1 Sheet 2 2 302LC04660 Pin 2 303NS24410 M4 nut 2 3CY06030 M4 x 8 screw 7 7BB180408H M4 x 14 scre...

Page 61: ...e power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 4 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 46 5 Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 47 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Screw Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook Rear upper cover Screws Screws Sc...

Page 62: ... then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 2 48 9 Release seven wire saddles on the con troller box 10 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 2 49 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddles Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 63: ...figure a When connecting an FFC furnished with the protrusions at both ends address the side with a blue colored tape towards the locking lever insert the FFC into the con nector until the protrusions are recessed and raise the lock lever to lock the FFC see figure b Figure 1 2 50 Controller box State of lock Lock release FFC detaching Main PWB Main PWB FFC connection Lock a b 1 Lock lever Lock le...

Page 64: ...ive screws 13 Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box Figure 1 2 51 14 Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers Figure 1 2 52 Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw Controller box Right upper cover Aperture ...

Page 65: ...r cover 16 Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 53 M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 x 14 screw Tray stay M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 nut ...

Page 66: ...ap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 54 18 Cut out the aperture plate on the tray cover using nippers Figure 1 2 55 M4 x 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount M4 x 8 screw Aperture Tray cover ...

Page 67: ...19 Pass the MK 2 signal cable through the aperture in the tray cover tray stay and right upper cover Figure 1 2 56 Tray stay Right upper cover Aperture Tray corer Aperture Aperture MK 2 MK 2 signal cable MK 2 signal cable ...

Page 68: ...able to the connector YC25 on the engine PWB 21 Remove the screw from the machine 22 Fix the MK 2 signal cable to the ground terminal with the screw that was removed Figure 1 2 57 Engine PWB MK 2 signal cable Screw Ground terminal Ground terminal Screw YC25 Engine PWB ...

Page 69: ...h the wire guide and fix it at three wire holders Dress the MK 2 signal wire away from the scanner motor and fix 25 Refit the controller box 26 Refit the left upper cover and the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 58 Wire holders Wire holder Wire guide Wire guide MK 2 signal cable Scanner motor ...

Page 70: ...optional right job separator has been installed Figure 1 2 59 28 Refit the right upper cover 29 Refit the ISU right cover 30 Close the paper conveying unit 31 Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using four M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 60 Tray retainer Tray retainer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screws Tray cover Tray stay M4 x 8 screws ...

Page 71: ... MK 2 mount to the MK 2 and secure using the four screws Figure 1 2 61 33 Fit the MK 2 to the document table using two M4 x 20 tap tight S screws Figure 1 2 62 MK 2 mount Screws Screws Screws Screws MK 2 MK 2 MK 2 Document table M4 x 20 tap tight S screw M4 x 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 72: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 2 48 34 Fit the tray lower cover 35 Secure the tray lower cover with two pins Figure 1 2 63 Tray lower cover Pin Pin ...

Page 73: ...heet onto right side of the document table 37 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 38 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Card see page 1 3 95 39 Exit the maintenance mode Figure 1 2 64 Sheet Document table ...

Page 74: ...le 1 HM000080 option PHS signal cable 1 023CK200 option KMAS interface PWB 1 023CK000 option M3 x 16 bronze binding screw 2 B3323160 Ferrite core 1 2A027770 Clamp 1 M2105910 KMAS wire set 1 302K994610 Parts Quantity Part No KMAS wire 1 302K946AG0 Spacer A 1 7YZM510009 H01 Spacer B 3 7YZM510011 H01 Parts Quantity Part No RS 232C signal cable 1 303CK60011 RS 232C relay cable 1 303CK60041 KMAS interf...

Page 75: ...x KMAS perform the following procedure Fitting the KMAS interface PWB Setting the DIP switch Using the PHS module Fitting the PHS signal cable and PHS module Using a modem Fitting the RS 232C signal cable Initializing the KMAS End Start ...

Page 76: ... is required when modem is used 3 Communication speed switching with the device ON 9600bps OFF 19200bps Set to OFF 4 Communication log when automatically notifying service calls Switching messages ON Message is fixed OFF Normal message is used When ON the message is Call a service representative When OFF the message will vary depend ing on communication status To setup the system with automatic ac...

Page 77: ...emove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 66 3 Attach one spacer A and three spacers B to the side of the controller box Figure 1 2 67 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Spacer B Spacer B Spacer A Controller box Spacer B ...

Page 78: ... PWB to three spacers B Figure 1 2 68 5 Remove YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB and connector of the controller fan mor Remove the relay wire Figure 1 2 69 Spacer B KMAS interface PWB Spacer B Spacer B Controller fan motor YC23 YC7 Relay wire Main PWB ...

Page 79: ... of the KMAS wire to the connector YC1 on the KMAS PWB 7 Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to controller fan motor YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB Figure 1 2 70 KMAS wire KMAS interface PWB YC1 Controller fan motor YC23 YC7 KMAS wire Main PWB ...

Page 80: ...he PHS signal cable and PHS mod ule 9 Remove two screws and then remove the lid from the rear upper cover 10 Pass the PHS signal cable through the aperture in the rear upper cover 11 Secure the PHS signal cable to rear upper cover with two screws Figure 1 2 72 Wire saddle KMAS wire Edging Screw Screw Screw Lid Rear upper cover PHS signal cable Screw ...

Page 81: ...l cable to the connector YC2 on the KMAS interface PWB 13 Refit the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 73 14 Fit the PHS module to rear upper cover using two M3 x 16 screws Figure 1 2 74 YC2 PHS signal cable KMAS interface PWB Rear upper cover PHS module M3 x 16 screws ...

Page 82: ...eferring to the instructions given to fix the PHS signal wire insert the con nector at the end of the RS 232C relay cable to the YC3 connector on the KMAS interface PWB If the wire length is short use a RS 232C extension cable 2 Connect the RS 232C signal cable to the modem Initializing the KMAS 1 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 2 Run maintenance item U202 and Per form...

Page 83: ... the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Fit the vender base to coin vender using four M4 x 6 screws Figure 1 2 76 Parts Quantity Part No Coin vender 1 1905H99JP0 option Vender wire 1 Supplied with coin vender Vender base 1 M4 x 6 screw 4 Ferrite core 1 Clamp 1 Vender signal cable 1 302K946AE0 Coin vender M4 x 6 s...

Page 84: ...s and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 77 4 Remove eight screws 5 Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover Figure 1 2 78 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screw Screw Screws Screws ...

Page 85: ...t the connector of the vender signal cable to the connector YC23 on the engine PWB 8 Pass the vender signal cable through nine wire saddles and then fasten the cable Figure 1 2 80 Screws Lid YC23 Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire saddles Vender signal cable Engine PWB ...

Page 86: ... to rear frame with the screw 12 Connect the connector of the vender wire to connector of the vender signal cable Figure 1 2 81 13 Refit the rear lower and upper covers 14 Connect the signal cable of coin vender to connector of the vender wire Figure 1 2 82 Screws Vender wire Ground terminal Screw Ground terminal Screw Vender signal cable IF mount Signal cable of coin vender Vender wire ...

Page 87: ...x the price size decal at the right side of the coin vender operation panel Figure 1 2 84 19 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 20 Run maintenance mode U206 and acti vate Coin vender is installed Continue configuring the coin vender required see page 1 3 96 21 Exit the maintenance mode Screw Clamp Ferrite core Signal cable of coin vender Signal cable of coin vender Coin v...

Page 88: ...rts of cassette heater set 302K994940 Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater set 120V 1 302K994930 Cassette heater set 240V 1 302K994940 Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater 120V 1 302H794620 Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001 H0 M3 x 8 tap tight S screw 2 7BB700308H Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater 240V 1 302H794610 Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001 H0 M3 x 8 tap tight S screw 2 7BB700308H ...

Page 89: ...mory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the cassette 1 forward 3 Remove the pin and then remove the cassette 1 Figure 1 2 85 4 Pull the cassette 2 forward 5 Remove the pin and then remove the cassette 3 Figure 1 2 86 Pin Cassette1 Pin Cassette2 ...

Page 90: ...L 2LJ 2LH 1 2 66 6 Fit three wire saddles on the bottom frame of the machine 7 Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 87 Cassette heater Screw Screw Wire saddle Wire saddle Wire saddle ...

Page 91: ...nnector of the cassette heater to the connector in the rear frame of the machine 9 Pass the wire of the cassette heater through three wire saddles and then fasten the wire Figure 1 2 88 Cassette heater Wire saddles Wire saddle Connector ...

Page 92: ...ion panel to off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Open the controller lid 3 Remove two pins and then remove the slot cover of the OPT2 Figure 1 2 89 Parts Quantity Part No Gigabit ethernet board 1 1505JV0UN0 option Slot cover Pin Pin Controller lid OPT2 ...

Page 93: ...rectly touch the gigabit ethernet board terminal Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit ethernet board or the projection of the board to insert the gigabit ethernet board Figure 1 2 90 5 Plug the modular connector cable into the line terminal 6 Close the controller lid Figure 1 2 91 Groove Pin Pin Gigabit ethernet board Modular connector cable Controller lid ...

Page 94: ... off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove the pin of the card reader base and then remove the card reader mount Figure 1 2 92 Parts Quantity Part No IC card reader holder 1 1709AD0UN0 option Parts Quantity Part No Card reader case 1 Card reader base 1 Card reader mo...

Page 95: ...l using a flat blade screwdriver 4 Fit the card reader mount to the machine using two pins Figure 1 2 93 5 Refit the card reader base to card reader mount using the pin removed in step 2 Figure 1 2 94 Card reader mount Pins Cover Card reader mount Card reader base Pin ...

Page 96: ...ader 10mm to 22mm Face the mark A upwards Less than 10mm Face the mark B upwards Figure 1 2 95 7 Route the USB wire of the IC card reader through the aperture of the card reader base and mount the IC card reader on the card reader base Figure 1 2 96 A A B B Card reader tray Card reader tray Card reader base Card reader base Aperture USB wire IC card reader ...

Page 97: ...o hooks of the card reader case to fit the card reader case to the card reader base Press its top until it clicks in Figure 1 2 97 9 Fit six clamps Right side three Rear side three Figure 1 2 98 A A Card reader case Hooks Clamps Clamps ...

Page 98: ...nippers Figure 1 2 99 11 Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader through six clamps and then fasten the wire 12 Connect the USB wire to the machine If the length does not suffice use the USB wire supplied Figure 1 2 100 Breakaway cover Controller lid Clamps Clamps USB wire USB wire ...

Page 99: ...itch on 2 Press the System Menu key and then press System If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to log in with admin istrator privileges 3 Press Next of Optional Function 4 Select CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT B and press Activate 5 The License Key entry screen is displayed Enter the ...

Page 100: ...the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Remove the staple holder and then remove two screws Figure 1 2 101 Parts Quantity Part No Keyboard holder 1 1709AF0UN0 option Parts Quantity Part No Upper keyboard holder 1 Lower keyboard holder 1 Keyboard cover 1 Velcro A 2 Velcro B 2 Film 1 1 M4 x 8...

Page 101: ...hine using two screws removed in step 2 Figure 1 2 102 4 Fit the upper keyboard mount to the lower keyboard mount using two M4 x 8 tap tight S screws Figure 1 2 103 Lower keyboard mount Screws Upper keyboard mount M4 x 8 tap tight S screw M4 x 8 tap tight S screw ...

Page 102: ...eyboard mount by the five hooks 6 Fit the keyboard cover to the upper key board mount using three M4 x 8 tap tight P screws Figure 1 2 104 Keyboard cover M4 x 8 tap tight P screw M4 x 8 tap tight P screw M4 x 8 tap tight P screw Upper keyboard mount Hooks Hook Hooks ...

Page 103: ...here two Velcro tapes onto the upper keyboard mount Figure 1 2 105 8 Adhere two Velcro tapes onto back side of the keyboard Figure 1 2 106 Upper keyboard mount Velcro tape Velcro tape Velcro tape Keyboard back side Velcro tape ...

Page 104: ... 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 80 9 Align the Velcro tapes with each other mount the keyboard onto the upper key board mount Figure 1 2 107 10 Fit the spaple cover Figure 1 2 108 Upper keyboard mount Keyboard Staple cover ...

Page 105: ...LJ 2LH 1 1 2 81 11 Cut out the breakaway cover on the controller lid using nippers Figure 1 2 109 12 Fit five clamps Left side three Rear side two Figure 1 2 110 Breakaway cover Controller lid Clamps Clamps ...

Page 106: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 82 13 Pass the USB wire of the keyboard through five clamps and then fasten the wire 14 Connect the USB wire to the machine Figure 1 2 111 Clamps Clamps USB wire ...

Page 107: ...n the device Handset installation requires the following parts Supplied parts of handset 1909AG9JP0 Parts Quantity Part No Handset 1 1909AG9JP0 option Parts Quantity Part No Handset 1 Handset base 1 Handset mount 1 Protection cover 1 Pin 2 Telephone wire 1 Modular cable 1 M4 nut 2 3CY06030 A B A B ...

Page 108: ...before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 4 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 112 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Screw Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook ...

Page 109: ...upper cover 6 Fit the handset mount to the right upper cover using two pins Use the lower screw holes Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 113 A B A B M4 nuts Right upper cover Pins Pins Handset mount M4 nuts Right upper cover Pin M4 nut ...

Page 110: ...right upper cover 8 Refit the ISU right cover 9 Close the paper conveying unit 10 Remove two nuts and two pins from the handset mount and remount it at mark B Figure 1 2 114 A B A B A B A B B Nut Pin Pin Nut Nut Handset mount Pins Nut ...

Page 111: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 87 11 Insert the pins at the insert parts on the back of the handset base and slide it towards you Figure 1 2 115 A B A B A B A B A B A B Handset base Pin Pin ...

Page 112: ... the protection cover to the handset mount Figure 1 2 116 13 Connect the telephone wire to the handset and the handset base Figure 1 2 117 A B A B A B A B Protection cover Handset mount A B A B Telephone wire Handset Handset base ...

Page 113: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 89 14 Connect the modular cable to the hand set base and the machine Figure 1 2 118 A B A B Modular cable Modular cable Handset base ...

Page 114: ... Part No Handset 1 1909AG9JP0 option Document table 1 1902H70UN1 option Parts Quantity Part No Handset 1 Handset base 1 Handset mount 1 Protection cover 1 Pin 2 Telephone wire 1 Modular cable 1 M4 nut 2 3CY06030 Parts Quantity Part No Tray stay 1 Tray mount 1 Tray cover 1 302LC04600 Tray lower cover 1 302LC04710 Tray retainer 1 Sheet 2 302LC04660 Pin 2 303NS24410 M4 nut 2 3CY06030 M4 x 8 screw 7 7...

Page 115: ...before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 4 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 119 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Screw Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook ...

Page 116: ...r cover 6 Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 120 M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 x 14 screw Tray stay M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 nut ...

Page 117: ...4 x 8 screw The procedure described above is not required if an optional right job separator has been installed 8 Refit the right upper cover 9 Refit the ISU right cover 10 Close the paper conveying unit Figure 1 2 121 Tray retainer Tray retainer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw ...

Page 118: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 94 11 Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 122 M4 x 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount M4 x 8 screw ...

Page 119: ... screws Figure 1 2 123 13 Remove two nuts and two pins from the handset mount 14 Replace the two nuts and two pins which were removed at mark A on the tray mount Figure 1 2 124 M4 x 8 screws Tray cover M4 x 8 screws B A B A A B A B A Tray mount Pins Nuts Handset mount Pins Nuts ...

Page 120: ...the insert parts on the back of the handset base and slide it towards you Figure 1 2 125 16 Cut out the breakaway cover on the tray lower cover using nippers Figure 1 2 126 B B A A B B A A B A A Handset base Pins Tray lower cover Breakaway cover ...

Page 121: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 97 17 Fit the tray lower cover 18 Secure the tray lower cover with two pins Figure 1 2 127 B B A A B B A A B B A A Tray lower cover Pin Pin ...

Page 122: ...here the sheet onto left side of the document table Figure 1 2 128 20 Connect the telephone wire to the handset and the handset base Figure 1 2 129 B B A A B B A A Sheet Document table B B A A Telephone wire Handset Handset base ...

Page 123: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 2 99 21 Connect the modular cable to the hand set base and the machine Figure 1 2 130 B B A A Modular cable Handset base Modular cable ...

Page 124: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 2 100 ...

Page 125: ...e numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop key Press the start key Start End Maintenance mode is entered The maintenance item is selected Maintenance mode is exited Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item No No Yes Yes Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys...

Page 126: ...king the operation of the clutches U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids U034 Adjusting the print start timing LSU Out Top 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSU Out Left 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper 330 210 U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors U039 Adjusting the magnification 0 U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 ...

Page 127: ... 0 0 U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 0 0 U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0 0 0 0 U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0 0 0 U073 Checking the scanner operation U074 DP input response adjustment 1 U087 Setting DP reading position modification opera tion 125 125 125 U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern U091 Setting the white line correction 112 75 0 U099 Adjusting original size detection DP i...

Page 128: ...08 108 101 112 112 104 105 105 101 Bias 163 163 108 100 163 163 113 102 164 164 117 105 U110 Checking the drum count U111 Checking the drum drive time U117 Checking the drum number U118 Displaying the drum history U119 Setting the drum U127 Checking clearing the transfer count U128 Setting transfer high voltage timing 20 13 18 15 15 18 Developer U130 Initial setting for the developer U131 Adjustin...

Page 129: ...mode 2 U155 Checking sensors for toner U156 Setting the toner replenishment level Supply 512 Empty 100 U157 Checking the developer drive time U158 Checking the developer count Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Warm Up 110 110 155 150 155 160 110 110 160 155 160 160 110 110 170 165 170 160 Print 160 170 0 165 175 0 175 185 0 U163 Resetting the fuser problem data U167 Checking clearin...

Page 130: ... U223 Operation panel lock Unlock U224 Panel sheet extension U234 Setting punch destination Inch Inch Europe Metric Metric U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0 0 U240 Checking the operation of the finisher U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors U244 Checking the DP switches U245 Checking messages U246 Setting the finisher Finisher...

Page 131: ... due indication 0 Image processing U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 9 U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for mem ory image printing 0 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Table1 U411 Adj...

Page 132: ...learing the print coverage data U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes U917 Setting backup data reading writing U920 Checking the copy counts U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only U928 Checking machine life counts U930 Checking clearing the charger roller count U935 Relay board maintenance Mode0 U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0 0 0 U952 Maintenan...

Page 133: ...od 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key A list is output 4 Press the start key The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location The output status is displayed Display Output list Maintenance List of the current settings...

Page 134: ...n power switch on 4 Enter the maintenance item 5 Press the start key 6 Select the item to be send 7 Select Text or HTML 8 Press the start key Output will be sent to the USB memory Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Output list Print Outputs the report USB Text Sends output data to the USB memory text type USB HTML S...

Page 135: ... 40 50 999 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count 9999999 8888888 7777777 6666666 5555555 4444444 3333333 2222222 1111111 999999 888888 777777 666666 555555 444444 1 Event Descriprions 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 ...

Page 136: ... the case of paper jam refer to Paper Misfeed Detection P 1 4 1 b Detail of paper source Hexadecimal 00 MP tray 01 Cassette 1 02 Cassette 2 03 Cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder 04 Cassette 4 paper feeder large capacity feeder 05 Cassette 5 side deck 06 to 09 Reserved c Detail of paper size Hexadecimal 00 Not specified 01 Monarch 02 Business 03 International DL 04 International C5 05 Ex...

Page 137: ...ecimal 01 Face down FD 02 Face up FU 1000 sheet finisher face up FU 4000 sheet finisher left sub tray FU 03 1000 sheet finisher face down FD 4000 sheet finisher main tray FD 05 Job separator tray 06 4000 sheet finisher right sub tray FU 07 4000 sheet finisher left sub tray FD 09 4000 sheet finisher right sub tray FD 0A Center folding unit tray 0B Mailbox tray 1 FD 0C Mailbox tray 1 FU 15 Mailbox t...

Page 138: ...n tainer is less than 8 all of the occur rences of replace ment are logged The total page count at the time of the replacement of the toner container Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container Second byte Type of replacing item 00 Black First byte Replacing item 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 01 MK 6305A 11 Unknown Ton...

Page 139: ...es the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances includ ing those are not occurred are dis played Indicates the log counter of self diag nostics errors depending on cause Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has hap pened four times Indicates the log coun ter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance T Toner container 00 Black M Maintenance...

Page 140: ... Keyboard USB Keyboard Type Installed Cassette 500 x 2 Not Installed 1000 Finisher Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed Connected US English FAX Information Slot1 Slot2 Rings Normal Rings FAX TEL Rings TAD Option DIMM Size 3 3 3 16 MB Print Coverage Average Total K 1 10 Copy K 1 10 Printer K 1 10 FAX K 1 10 Period Last Page K C M Y Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 1111111 11 ...

Page 141: ...000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 ...

Page 142: ...talled 14 Presence or absence of the finisher 1000 sheet finisher 4000 sheet finisher Not Installed 15 Presence or absence of the job separator Installed Not Installed 16 Presence or absence of the printed document guard kit Installed Not Installed 17 Presence or absence of the IC card authentication kit Installed Not Installed Trial 18 Presence or absence of the internet fax kit Installed Not Ins...

Page 143: ...te 38 RP code Code the engine software version and the date of the previous update 39 RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous update 40 NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225 a b c d e f a Consistency of the present software version and the database _ underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of database version d Consistency of the present soft...

Page 144: ...kit A 51 Panel lock information 0 Off 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock 52 USB information U00 Not installed U01 Full speed U02 Hi speed 53 Paper handling information 0 Paper source unit select 1 Paper source unit 54 Black and white printing double count mode 0 All single counts 1 A3 Single count Less than 420 mm length 2 Legal Single count 356 mm or less length 3 Folio Single count Less than 330 mm leng...

Page 145: ...tion information 70 Calibration information 71 Calibration information 72 RFID information 73 RFID reader writer version infor mation 74 Maintenance information 75 Altitude 0 Standard 1 High altitude 1 2 High altitude 2 76 Charger roller correction 1 to 5 77 Data Sanitization information 78 Toner low setting 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 79 Toner low detection level 0 to 100 80 Drum serial number Code conv...

Page 146: ...of the scanner to the position for transport Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Mode1 All 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the home position 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initializ...

Page 147: ...chine number Purpose To check or set the machine number Method 1 Press the start key If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Writing of serial No starts 3 Turn the main power switch off ...

Page 148: ...are mandatory to contain 3 Select New ID Reconfirm 4 Enter a new 8 digit ID on ten keys 0 9 5 Press the start key The setting is set Method Initialize 1 Select Initialize 2 Press the start key ID is initialized Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description New ID Enter a new 8 digit ID New ID Reconfirm Enter a new ...

Page 149: ...er ROM Scanner Boot Scanner booting RFID RFID ROM Dictionary Option Language Optional language ROM PDF1 7 Resource PDF1 7 resource ROM Solution Framework Framework ROM FMU FMU ROM Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ROM DP Document processor ROM DP Boot Document processor booting PF1 Paper feeder Large capacity feeder ROM PF1 Boot Paper feeder Large capacity feeder booting Side PF Side deck ROM Side PF Boot...

Page 150: ...key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Fax APL1 Fax APL 1 Fax Boot1 Fax booting 1 Fax IPL1 Fax IPL 1 Fax APL2 Fax APL 2 dual Fax Fax Boot2 Fax booting 2 dual Fax Fax IPL2 Fax IPL 2 dual Fax ...

Page 151: ...thod 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and exe...

Page 152: ...ddress book one touch keys and doc ument box etc shortcuts and panel programs When fully formatted the following pre installed software are removed Option language PDF1 7 resource FMU weekly timer Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item 3 Press Execute 4 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item ...

Page 153: ...ance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed Paper feed motor PFM is turned on DLP K Developer motor DEVM is turned on Fuser Fuser motor FUM is turned on SB CW Eject motor EM is turned on clockwise SB CCW Eject motor EM is turned on counterclockwise Job Separator JS eject motor JSEM is turned on Regist Registration motor RM is turned on Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 BRCM1 ...

Page 154: ...ed in reverse Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description MPT Jam MP feed sensor MPFS Cassette1 Feed Feed sensor 1 FS1 Cassette2 Feed Feed sensor 2 FS2 Feed2 Feed B Paper conveying sensor PCS Regist Registration sensor RS Exit Feed Fuser eject sensor FUES DU1 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 DU2 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 Bridge2 ...

Page 155: ... for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed1 Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 is turned on Feed2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 is turned on Mid Roller 1 Middle clutch MCL is turned on MPT Feed MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL is turned on Regist 1 Registration clutch RCL is turned on Feed Paper conveying clutch PCCL is turned on DU1 1 Duplex clutch 1 DUCL1 is tur...

Page 156: ...ion starts 45 ppm 55 ppm model only 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Branch Exit Feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on Pick Up1 Pickup solenoid 1 2 PUSOL1 2 is turned on Job Separator JS feedshift solenoid JSFSSOL is turned on ID Clean Cleaning solenoid CLSOL is t...

Page 157: ...s used Item No Description Display Description LSU Out Top Leading edge registration adjustment LSU Out Left Center line adjustment Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step MPT L Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm MPT Half L Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette L Paper feed from cassette 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette Half L Paper feed from ...

Page 158: ...Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output a test pattern 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted Item No Description Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Leading edge registration 20 1 0 mm U034 U066 P 1 3 49 U071 P 1 3 54 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step MPT Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Casset...

Page 159: ...start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Center line of printing within 2 0 mm Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 U034 U067 P 1 3 50 U072 P 1 3 56 ...

Page 160: ...per by setting the actual printing area for folio paper Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Length Length 330 to 356 mm 330 Width Width 2...

Page 161: ...tion Group Fuser Cooling Fuser rear fan motor FURFM is turned on B LSU Cooling LSU fan motor LSUFM is turned on B Exit Cooling Eject front fan motor EFFM is turned on B Toner Toner fan motor TFM is turned on A Low Volt Power source fan motor PSFM is turned on A Exit Rear Cooling Eject rear fan motor EFRM is turned on B IH PWB Heater fan motor HFM is turned on A IH Coil Fuser front fan motor FUFFM ...

Page 162: ...he system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Adjustment Sub Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Figure 1 3 6 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description U039 U065 P 1 ...

Page 163: ...idth of paper S When small size paper is used Item No Description Display Description Paper Loop Amount Deflection adjustment Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm MPT L Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 5 8 MPT Half L Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 0 1 Cassette L Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 1 5 8 Cassette Half L Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 1 0 1 Dupl...

Page 164: ...put example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflec tion Figure 1 3 7 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 ...

Page 165: ... Loop Sensor Control 1 Select the item 2 Select On or Off 3 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description Set Loop Sensor Enter the data value for loop sensor Loop Sensor Control Set the loop sensor detection control Set Loop Sensor Valid Sets the presence or absence of the loop sensor Chk Loop Sensor Display the data value for loop sensor 1 e g How to read the sen...

Page 166: ...m to be adjusted Item No Description Display Description Moter1 Adjustment of drum motor speeds Moter2 Adjustment of developer motor registration motor and transfer motor speeds Moter3 Adjustment of eject motor fuser motor BR conveying motor 1 2 paper feed motor JS eject motor middle motor and duplex motor 1 2 speeds Moter1 Half Adjustment of drum motor speeds in half speed Moter2 Half Adjustment ...

Page 167: ...3 10 Fixing Fuser motor FUM 5000 to 5000 30 24 20 Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 BRCM1 5000 to 5000 26 20 15 Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 BRCM2 5000 to 5000 26 20 15 Feed Paper feed motor PFM 5000 to 5000 66 120 97 Job Separator JS eject motor JSEM 5000 to 5000 35 26 19 Mid Roller Middle motor MM 5000 to 5000 72 58 DU1 Duplex motor 1 DUM1 5000 to 5000 10 8 DU2 Duplex motor 2 DUM2 5000 to 5000 10 8 B...

Page 168: ...Belt Transfer motor TRM in half speed 5000 to 5000 56 44 35 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm SB Eject motor EM in half speed 5000 to 5000 106 82 66 Fixing Fuser motor FUM in half speed 5000 to 5000 0 0 0 Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 BRCM1 in half speed 5000 to 5000 112 86 70 Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 BRCM2 in half speed 5000 to 5000 112 86 70 Feed Paper feed m...

Page 169: ...at which developer fan motors oper ate Cooling Mode Sets temperature at which the developer fan motors are switched for controlling Display Description Mode1 Setting temperature Normal Mode2 Setting temperature Temperature threshold is raised from mode1 WUP temperature at READY mode1 temperature 7 C Tempera ture at PRINT mode1 temperature 3 C Mode3 Setting temperature Temperature threshold is rais...

Page 170: ...shading posi tion should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this mainten...

Page 171: ...ace an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Adjustment Main Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image Figure 1 3 8 2 Press the start key The value i...

Page 172: ...alue For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Figure 1 3 9 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 ...

Page 173: ...e 2 decrease the value Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image backward Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Descr...

Page 174: ...se the value For copy example 2 increase the value Increasing the value moves the image leftward and decreasing it moves the image rightward Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item...

Page 175: ... left when the setting value is decreased 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 Select Black Line 6 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 7 Press the start key The value is set 8 Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key 9 Press the start key Test copy is executed 10 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value ...

Page 176: ... 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Figure 1 3 12 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Sub Scan F Magnificati...

Page 177: ...he setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image Figure 1 3 13 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the magnification perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 U039 P 1 3 38 U070 ...

Page 178: ...iption Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Front Head Leading edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 0 0 085 mm Front Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 0 0 085 mm Back Head Leading edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 0 0 085 mm Back Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 0 0 085 mm Display Description Setting range In...

Page 179: ...bove adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes Adjustment Trailing edge registration 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 15 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and i...

Page 180: ...ease the value Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward Figure 1 3 16 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes Completion Press the st...

Page 181: ... Select Execute 6 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 7 To stop operation press the stop key Item No Description Display Description Scanner Motor Scanner operation Home Position Home position operation Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on DP Reading DP scanning position operation Display Operating conditions Setting range Zoom Magnification 25 to 400...

Page 182: ... Select Dust Check 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Method DP Reading 1 Select DP Reading 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Item No Description ...

Page 183: ...ting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Settings 0 No correction 1 Slight correction 2 Medium correction 3 Strong correction 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key ...

Page 184: ... are modified when System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Correcting Black Line is set to Off Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Method Black Line 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The setting is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for select...

Page 185: ... pattern to be output and press the start key 3 Press the system menu key 4 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display PG pattern to be output Purpose Gray Scale To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics Mono1 Output density 0 To check the drum quality Mono4...

Page 186: ...ertical black lines appear on the gray band and vertical white lines appear in the black band in the same position clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat white line correction If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets white line correction has been completed normally However the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine and thus the engine must be c...

Page 187: ... set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures No lines No lines Complete Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS glass Clean CIS roller or CIS glass and then perform U091 again Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends check engine No lines White lines Engine side U091 en...

Page 188: ... Level1 Setting original size detection threshold value Data2 Displaying original size detection transmission data when DP is installed Display Description Original Area R Detected original width size for color R Original Area G Detected original width size for color G Original Area B Detected original width size for color B Original Area Detected original width size Size SW L Displays the origina...

Page 189: ...l docu ment If the values vary excessively mal detection could occur depending on how a document is placed Figure 1 3 17 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description 297 mm Original mat Original R G B Original width size range Fig 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 A4R to A3 B6R to A4R to B6R 8 5 to 11 5 5 to 8 5 to 5 5 2 3 ...

Page 190: ...dj 1 Select On or Off Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Displaying Set DC Bias 1 The current setting is displayed Item No Description Display Description Adj AC Bias Main charger AC bias for each color Set AC Auto Adj Setting the AC bias auto adjustment Set DC Bias Main charger DC bias for each color Adj DC Bias Additional surface potential Set Low Temp Pre charge time at...

Page 191: ... the or numeric keys lll 3 Press the start key The value is set Displaying Chk Current 1 The current setting is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting DC2 Bias K Main charger DC bias full speed 128 to 127 0 DC2 Bias Half K Main charger DC bias half speed 128 to 127 0 Display Descr...

Page 192: ...ansfer bias on paper with thickness 76 g m2 to 105 g m2 Heavy1 3 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 106 g m2 to 220 g m2 Heavy4 5 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 221 g m2 to 300 g m2 OHP Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies Bias Transfer bias value Display Description 1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the firs...

Page 193: ...tting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 150 174 146 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 143 165 140 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 139 157 134 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 146 160 133 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 139 153 130 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 135 120 Display Description 1st Half...

Page 194: ...o 255 105 109 109 Display Description 1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side half speed 2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side half speed Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 118 126 114 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 118 126 114 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 110 115 107 Display De...

Page 195: ... activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Reverse Transfer reverse bias full speed 0 to 255 163 163 164 Reverse Half Transfer reverse bias half speed 0 to 255 163 163 164 Cleaning Cleaning control value full speed 0 to 25...

Page 196: ...e when correcting the high voltage based on time Purpose To check the drum status Method 1 Press the start key The drum drive time is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number Purpose To check the drum number Method 1 Press the start key The drum number is displayed Completi...

Page 197: ...played U119 Setting the drum Description Sets drum sensitivity Purpose To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit When completed perform maintenance mode U464 Calibration After execution the U930 charging roller counter is cleared Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key Drum setup is commenced 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more t...

Page 198: ...ption Adjusts the ON OFF timing of transfer high voltage output Purpose Basically the setting need not be changed If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the back surface occurs change the setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to set 3 Change the value using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecti...

Page 199: ...utomatically executed when the developer unit loaded with the initial developer is replaced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description K Toner sensor control vo...

Page 200: ...be set Initial setting Auto 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Mode Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment Display Description Setting range Initial ...

Page 201: ...o is displayed U135 Checking toner motor operation Description Drives toner motors Purpose To check the operation of toner motors Remarks When driving the toner motors long time or several times developer section becomes the toner full and is locked Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select item 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop the operation press the stop key Completion Press the ...

Page 202: ...ting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer Decreasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty shorter If 0 is set toner near end will not be detected 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance ite...

Page 203: ...e current temperature is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Ext Int Internal External temperature C External humidity LSU Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C Developing Internal temperature around the developer section C Display Description External Temp External temperature C ...

Page 204: ...y The value is set Item No Description Display Description Sleeve DC Developer sleeve roller DC bias Sleeve AC Developer sleeve roller AC bias Mag DC Developer magnet roller DC bias Mag AC Developer magnet roller AC bias Sleeve Freq Developer sleeve roller frequency Sleeve Duty Developer sleeve roller duty Mag Duty Developer magnet roller duty AC Calib Executing or setting the AC calibration Displ...

Page 205: ...ys 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm K Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 148 148 180 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm K Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 101 101 199 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Normal Developer sleeve ...

Page 206: ...de 1 Select Mode1 or Mode2 Initial setting Mode1 2 Press the start key The value is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Calibration Executing the AC calibration Magnification AC calibration target bias value setting High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Display Description K When repla...

Page 207: ...cting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Display Description Display Description Default Initial setting 3000m Settings equivalent to the altitude of 3000 m 1000m Settings equivalent to the altitude of 1000 m 4000m Settings equivalent to the altitude of 4000 m 2000m Settings equivalent to the altitud...

Page 208: ...setting Mode1 2 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description Timing Setting timing to transit to toner applying Mode Settings for toner applying operation Upper Limit Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quantity with each mode Minimum Toner layer width when cleaning mode is selected Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Paper...

Page 209: ...hange settings when drum refreshing is too frequently executed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode 0 Off 1 Short 2 Standard 3 Long 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Value Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quant...

Page 210: ...Method Toner 1 Check the status of sensor The current value is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Waste Toner Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor Toner Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor Display Description Full Waste toner sensor 1 WTS1 Near Full Waste to...

Page 211: ...y The value is set Method Empty 1 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes toner empty appear later and decreasing it makes toner empty appear earlier 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Supply Setting the toner replenishment le...

Page 212: ...drive time is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U158 Checking the developer count Description Displays the developer count for checking Purpose To check the developer unit status Method 1 Press the start key The current developer counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is disp...

Page 213: ...tion Display Description Warm Up Control temperature except at printing Print Control temperature during printing Display Description Setting range Initial setting 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Ready Center Control temperature at display ing Ready Center 130 to 200 C 110 110 110 Ready Edge Control temperature at display ing Ready Edge 100 to 200 C 110 110 110 Drive Center Stable temperature during driv ing Ce...

Page 214: ...Off and On U167 Checking clearing the fuser count Description Displays and clears the fuser count for checking Purpose To check the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit Also to clear the counts after replac ing unit Method 1 Press the start key The fuser count is displayed Clearing 1 Press Clear 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for sele...

Page 215: ...he stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature Description Displays the detected fuser temperature Purpose To check the fuser temperature Method 1 Press the start key The fuser temperature is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No is displayed Item No Description Display Description On...

Page 216: ...ns on the touch panel after it is replaced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the Initialize or Check Method Initialize 1 Press the start key 2 Press the center of the keys Be sure to press three keys displayed in order The touch panel is adjusted automatically 3 Press the indicated three keys and then check the display 4 Press the stop key Method Check 1 Press the start key 2 Press the indicat...

Page 217: ... host initiated 7 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Method Call Service End 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Communication with the host initiated 3 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Result table Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Init...

Page 218: ...s the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Normal Speed Normal reading 600 dpi High Speed High speed reading Display Description CCD ADP With paper single sided original of CCD CCD RADP With paper double sided original of CCD CIS With paper double sided original of CIS CCD ADP Non P Without paper ...

Page 219: ... setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the Key Device or Coin Vender 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Device Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter Message Set...

Page 220: ... the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting No Coin Action 1 Select the item Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description On Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender No Coin Action Behavior when cha...

Page 221: ...unt0 is displayed and the left most LED on the operation panel lights 3 As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that li...

Page 222: ...main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator Description Sets the presence or absence of the inner job separator Purpose To run this maintenance item if the inner job separator is installed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Inner Job Separator 3 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 4 Press the start key The ...

Page 223: ... is set 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U222 Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card Purpose To change the type of IC card Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Initial setting Other 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed I...

Page 224: ...isplayed Item No Description Display Description Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu Partial Lock Lock the operation from the system menu Lock Lock the operation from the system menu and job cancel Item Partial Lock Lock Entering maintenance mode Prohibited Prohibited Entering system menu Prohibited Prohibited Transmission transmission from document boxes Prohibited Prohi...

Page 225: ...ted 9 When normally completed OK is displayed Supplement 1 File information Item No Description Display Description Install Installs the image data or the message data UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data Display Description Display area Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Messag...

Page 226: ...eeping The total size of the files installable is approximately 1 8 MB Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U234 Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of punch unit of 1000 sheet finisher or 4000 sheet finisher Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine Setting 1 Press the st...

Page 227: ...hange the setting using the keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non staple copying 10 sheets 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Main Tray Number of sheets of stack on the main tray Middle Tray Number of sheets of st...

Page 228: ...d on at low speed Middle H DF middle motor DFMM is turned on at high speed Middle L DF middle motor DFMM is turned on at low speed Eject H DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at high speed Eject L DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at low speed Save H DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at high speed Save L DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at low speed Tray DF tray motor DFTM is turned on Staple Move DF s...

Page 229: ... Tray DF feedshift solenoid DFFSSOL is turned on Save Drum DF drum solenoid DFDRSOL is turned on Booklet DF center fold solenoid DFCFSOL is turned on Punch Punch solenoid PUSOL is turned on Three Fold CF feedshift solenoid CFFSSOL is turned on Display Description Conv MB drive motor MBDM is turned on at paper conveying Branch MB drive motor MBDM is turned on at feedshift operation Display Descript...

Page 230: ...tch and sensor of the mailbox Booklet Checking the switch and sensor of the center folding unit Punch Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit Display Description Front Cover DF front cover switch DFFCSW MPT DF eject cover switch DFECSW Top Cover DF top cover switch DFTCSW Tray U Limit DF tray sensor 1 DFTS1 Tray HP2 DF tray sensor 2 DFTS2 Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3 DFTS3 Tray L Limit DF...

Page 231: ...Shift Tail HP DF shift sensor 2 DFSFS2 Shift Unlock HP DF shift release sensor DFSFRS Sub Tray Full DF sub tray full sensor DFSTFS Shift Set DF shift set sensor DFSFSS Display Description Eject MB eject sensor MBES Cover MB cover open close switch MBCOCSW Over Flow1 MB overflow sensor 1 MBOFS1 Over Flow2 MB overflow sensor 2 MBOFS2 Over Flow3 MB overflow sensor 3 MBOFS3 Over Flow4 MB overflow sens...

Page 232: ...FPES Eject CF eject sensor CFES Paper CF paper sensor CFPS Tray Full CF tray full sensor CFTFS Bundle Up HP CF adjustment sensor 1 CFADS1 Bundle Down HP CF adjustment sensor 2 CFADS2 Width Up HP CF side registration sensor 1 CFSRS1 Width Down HP CF side registration sensor 2 CFSRS2 Blade HP CF blade sensor CFBLS Tray CF tray switch CFTSW Set CF set switch CFSSW Left Guide CF left guide switch CFLG...

Page 233: ...stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Item No Description Display Description Feed Motor DP original feed motor DPOFM is turned on Conv Motor DP original conveying motor DPOCM is turned on Rev Motor 1 DP switchback motor DPSBM is turned on Lift Motor DP lift motor DPLM is turned on Rev Press Sol 1 DP pressure solenoid DPPSOL is turned on Rev Branch Sol 1 DP feedshift s...

Page 234: ...everse 1 Reversed DP only 2 Dual scan DP only Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed DP feed sensor DPFS Regist 1 DP registration sensor DPRS Timing DP timing sensor DPTS CIS Head 2 DP CIS sensor DPCS Tray 1 DP switchback sensor DPSBS Set DP original sensor DPOS Longitudinal DP original length switch DP...

Page 235: ...ethod 1 Press the start key 2 Change the message using the cursor up down keys When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the message corresponding the specified number is displayed 3 Change the language using the keys Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description ...

Page 236: ...es optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration guides to paper Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of tri folding position Adj...

Page 237: ...the keys or numeric keys If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A increase the setting value If the distance is larger than the value A decrease the setting value Figure 1 3 19 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing 20 to 20 0 0 ...

Page 238: ...eat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position Setting Shift Front HP Shift Tail HP 1 Select Shift Front HP or Shift Tail HP 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select Motor then Sort Test 6 Repeat the above ad...

Page 239: ...justment of front and back stapling home position 15 to 15 0 0 19 mm Sample 2 Sample 1 Display Description Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position Staple Pos1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 Letter size Staple Pos2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 Legal size Staple Pos3 Adjustment...

Page 240: ... Pos3 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys When staples are placed too far right sample 1 decrease the preset value When staples are placed too far left sample 2 increase the preset value Reference value within 2 mm Figure 1 3 22 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of upper sid...

Page 241: ...o far right sample 1 increase the preset value When the tri fold position too far left sample 2 decrease the setting value Reference value A 7 0 2 mm Figure 1 3 24 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of center...

Page 242: ...he stop key Item No Description Display Description 2PF Paper feeder LCF Large capacity feeder Side Deck Side deck Display Description Motor Off PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned off On PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned on Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 PFPCCL1 is turned on C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 PFPCCL2 is turned on V Feed H Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 i...

Page 243: ...ned off On PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned on Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 PFPCCL1 is turned on C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 PFPCCL2 is turned on V Feed Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 3 PFPCCL3 is turned on H Feed1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 is turned on H Feed2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 is turned on Cassette1 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 1 PFPU...

Page 244: ...nt Purpose Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No...

Page 245: ...rvice Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be changed 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The setting value is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range M Cnt A Count value fo...

Page 246: ...n 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U252 Error codes Item No Description Display Description Japan Metric Metric Japan specifications Inch Inch North America specifications Europe Metric Metric Europe specifications Asia Pacific Metric A...

Page 247: ...y 2 Select the item to set Displayed only if the setting of U276 Setting the copy count mode is Mode1 3 Select the count system Initial setting DBL A3 Ledger 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description B W Count system of black white mode Display Description SGL All Single...

Page 248: ...ress the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds ...

Page 249: ...on Enter delivery date in month day and year Purpose To operate when installing the machine Perform this to confirm the delivery date Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Today 3 Press the start key The delivery date is set Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The delivery date is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No De...

Page 250: ...Description Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature and humidity is detected Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Descript...

Page 251: ...terval 1 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting Mode 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Interval Paper interval control ON OFF setting Mode Setting mode of the paper interval control Display Descripti...

Page 252: ...ack Line Cnt 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON OFF setting...

Page 253: ...zes in relation to the A4 Letter size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Let ter size Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key ...

Page 254: ... On Supplement The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large Setting Adj Max Job 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys The maximum Printer jobs should be maximum jobs maximum copy jobs 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display De...

Page 255: ... set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 3 Press the start key The sett...

Page 256: ...hat of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range I...

Page 257: ... The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Lead Printer leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm A Margin Printer left margin 0 0 to 10 ...

Page 258: ...t key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A Margin Scanner left margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm B Margin Scanner leading edge margin 0 ...

Page 259: ...arrower Figure 1 3 27 7 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A Margin DP left margin 0 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm B Margin DP leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 5 mm C Margin DP right margin 0 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 5 mm A Margin Back DP left margin second si...

Page 260: ...ustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description U039 P 1 3 38 U034 P 1 3 34 U402 P 1 3 133 U403 P 1 3 134 U404 ...

Page 261: ... Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Figure 1 3 28 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item...

Page 262: ...ern 2 as the original Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them 7 Press the start key Adjustment is made second time 8 When normally completed Finish is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Error codes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Codes Desc...

Page 263: ... U411 4 Select Target 5 Select U425 and press the start key 6 Select Table Chart1 7 Select the item Item No Description Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N Table Chart1 Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec tion chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceUp Chart1 Do not use Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section first side chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceDown Chart1 Automatic adjustmen...

Page 264: ...cuting maintenance item U425 2 Set a specified original on the DP face up 3 Enter maintenance item U411 4 Select Target 5 Select U425 and press the start key 6 Select DP FaceUp Chart1 7 Select Input To automatically enter the target value 1 Enter the value for Adjust Original using maintenance item U425 2 Set a specified original P N 7505000005 on the DP face up 3 Enter maintenance item U411 4 Sel...

Page 265: ... 7 Select All To automatically enter the target value 1 Enter the value for Adjust Original using maintenance item U425 2 Set a specified original P N 7505000005 on the DP face down 3 Enter maintenance item U411 4 Select Target 5 Select Auto and press the start key 6 Select DP FaceDown Chart1 7 Select All 8 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed...

Page 266: ...main scanning and auxiliary scanning of the specified original P N 302AC68243 and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425 2 Set a specified original P N 302AC68243 on the DP Cut the trailing edge of the original Figure 1 3 29 3 Enter maintenance item U411 4 Select Target 5 Select U425 and press the start key 6 Select DP FaceUp Chart2 7 Select INPUT Item No Description Display Descripti...

Page 267: ...start key Auto adjustment starts Matrix 1 Select Matrix 2 Set a specified original P N 303JX57020 on the DP face down 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When ALL is selected the adjustment of Input MTF Gamma and Matrix can be executed at once When adjusting place the three specified originals on the DP face down and then press the start key Set the original 303JX57020 and then place 303J...

Page 268: ... Codes Description 01 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge skew 02 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction far end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction near end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge skew 04 Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning di...

Page 269: ...canning direction center line error 15 DP main scanning direction skew error 16 Main scanning direction magnification error 17 Service call error 18 DP paper misfeed error 19 PWB replacement error 1a Original error 1b Input gamma adjustment original error 1c Matrix adjustment original error 1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error 1e Lab value searching error 1f Lab value...

Page 270: ...tputted 2nd sheet A test pattern is outputted with light quantity setting lower than the 1st test pattern by 20 5 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the original 6 Press the start key the correction starts 7 After the correction is completed and press the start key A test pattern is outputted 3rd sheet 8 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper...

Page 271: ... Description S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error S002 Original deviation in the main scanning direction E002 Spotted background error E003 Density error S003 Original deviation in the auxil iary scanning direction E004 Uneven density error EFFF Engine other error S004 Original inclination error C001 Controller error S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error SFFF Scanner oth...

Page 272: ... No is displayed Item No Description Codes Description S001 Black band is not detected main scanning direction far end S002 Black band is not detected main scanning direction near end S003 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction leading edge S004 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew error 1 5 mm or more S006 Ma...

Page 273: ...ription White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the magenta pat...

Page 274: ...ht edge black belt 2 of the original at F 15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1 5 Enter the values using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys in Dist2 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D and E 1 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 o...

Page 275: ...5 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment R Setting the red patch for the original for ad...

Page 276: ...ement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt b of the original at D 35 mm from the left edge E 110 mm from the left edge and F 185 mm from the left edge respec tively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D F 2 E 2 5 Enter the values solved using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys in Main Scan 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure the le...

Page 277: ...ginal at B 4 Enter the measured value using the keys in Main Scan 5 Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge inside to the black belt of trailing edge inside of the original at C 6 Enter the measured value using the keys in Sub Scan 7 Press the start key The value is set Figure 1 3 32 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No ...

Page 278: ...n after printing Mode Setting the calibration execution mode On Sleep Out Setting execution parameters for calibration when powered up or reverted from auto sleep AP NE Paper interval calibration ON OFF setting at the time of cali bration near end after toner feed Leaving Time Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine rec...

Page 279: ...erval time of calibration 0 to 9999 s 480 Display Description Short Setting the calibration execution mode short Normal Setting the calibration execution mode normal Long Setting the calibration execution mode long Custom Setting the calibration execution mode custom Display Description On Executes calibration if fuser temperature is less than 50 C 122 F at power up or recovery from auto sleep mod...

Page 280: ...bration is executed Duplicates selecting System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Calibration The same operation as System menu Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Time min Setting the standard time of sleep mode 0 to 480 min 480 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Ti...

Page 281: ...Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description TCONT Developer bias control value after ID correction Laser Power Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration Bias Calib Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration T7 CTD T7 control value Display Description Before K Developer bias control va...

Page 282: ...ease image quality but lower the image processing speed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Setting Copy 1 Select the item to be set 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Copy Compression ratio for copying Send Compression ratio for sending System Comp...

Page 283: ...he screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode Text Compression ratio in the text mode HC PDF Compression ratio of high compression PDF Display Description Setting range Initial setting Y1 to Y5 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 CbCr1 to CbCr5 Compression ratio of color differential ...

Page 284: ... larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting PDF Rotation 1 Change the setting value using keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Con...

Page 285: ...ll and press Clear 3 Press the start key The counts is cleared Back up 1 Select the paper feed location 2 Select Engine when changing the PF main PWB Backup the Engine counter values to Enhancement Select Enhancement when changing the paper feed unit Backup the Enhancement counter values to Engine 3 Select Execute 4 Press the start key Back up the counter values 5 Turn the main power switch off an...

Page 286: ...played 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for jam code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of jam code by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared Completion Pr...

Page 287: ...isplayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for service call code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call count ...

Page 288: ...o Description Display Description DP Counts of DP DF Counts of 1000 sheet or 4000 sheet finisher Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP CIS No of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP Display Description Sorter No of copies that has passed Staple Frequency the stapler has been...

Page 289: ...ription Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method 1 Press the start key The total count value is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U910 Clearing the print coverage data Description Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time as shown on the servic...

Page 290: ... cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display metric Description Display inch Description A3 Paper feed counts for A3 Ledger Paper feed counts for Ledger B4 Paper feed counts for B4 Legal Paper feed counts for Legal A4 Paper feed counts for A4 Letter Paper feed counts for Letter B5 Paper feed counts for B5 Statement P...

Page 291: ...ing The progress of selected item is displayed in When an error occurs the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed 8 When normally completed Finish is displayed 9 Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting Import Item No Description Display Description Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB ...

Page 292: ...x close error e113 Job accounting error in writing e419 Box creation error e114 Job accounting list error e41a Box creation error e115 Job accounting list error e41b Box deletion error e210 One touch open error e41c Box movement error e211 One touch list error e510 Program error in writing e212 One touch list error e511 Program error in reading e310 User managements backup error e610 Shortcut erro...

Page 293: ... reading error e917 Synchronization error d00c File writing error e918 Synchronization error d00d File copy error d000 Unspecified error d00e File compressed error d001 HDD unavailable d00f File decompressed error d002 USB memory is not inserted d010 Directory open error d003 File for writing is not found in the USB d011 Directory creation error d004 File for reading is not found in the HDD d012 F...

Page 294: ...cription Resets all of the counts back to zero Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count val ues are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Descri...

Page 295: ...ng or clearing Purpose To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit To clear the counter value when replacing the charger roller unit Method 1 Press the start key The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the st...

Page 296: ...rs again when progress of period Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Mode using the keys Initial setting Mode0 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Supplement After removing the cause of the problem be sure to change the setting in OFF Item No Description Display Description Mode0 Setting mode OFF Mode1 Set...

Page 297: ...setting value using the keys or numeric keys l 1 Reversed DP only The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflection If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance ...

Page 298: ... assign a maintenance Nbr into a workflow 4 Press the start key The setting is set 5 Press the start key Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession Item No Description Display Description Continue Restarting an abandoned workflow Execute USB Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device Execute Executes a worlflow stored in the machine Entry USB Exports a workflow housed in ...

Page 299: ...Turn the main power switch on 4 Enter maintenance item U952 5 Select Entry USB 6 Select the workflow 7 Select the work flow save area 8 Select Execute Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine Example Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text mainte nance ID editable is inserted File Format xxx mwf R MNFC WFPS 1 SET UP 464 410 000 927 2...

Page 300: ... than 5 seconds between Off and On If a problem occurs during auto correction error code is displayed Supplement Instructions on how to obtain a log when the operation panel has frozen Simultaneously press and hold the 8 6 and Clear keys for 3 to 6 seconds to start logging The memory indicator keeps lighting during a log is generated and goes off when completed Error codes U969 Checking of toner a...

Page 301: ...aintenance item U977 5 Select Execute 6 Press the start key 7 Send the print data to the machine Once the print data is stored into USB memory Finish will be displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U984 Checking the developer unit number Description Displays the developer unit number Purpose To check the developer unit number Method 1 Pre...

Page 302: ...isk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed 4 Turn the main pow...

Page 303: ...splayed U991 Checking the scanner operation count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method 1 Press the start key The current operation counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance No item is displayed Item No Description Display Description CIS The accumulated time for the CIS to light Disp...

Page 304: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 3 180 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 305: ...eying cover Figure 1 4 1 Paper misfeed indication A D I F K K K K K K K K L H I J G B C E E E G C C A Misfeed in cassette 1 B Misfeed in cassette 2 C Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4 option D Misfeed in the MP tray E Misfeed in paper conveying unit paper conveying cover or PF paper conveying cover F Misfeed in the duplex section G Misfeed in the fuser section H Misfeed in document processor option I Mis...

Page 306: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 4 2 2 Paper misfeed detection condition Machine Figure 1 4 2 Paper jam location PCS MPFS DUS2 LPS DUS1 SBS FS1 MS RS FUES EFS FS2 ...

Page 307: ... print ing E 0111 Front cover open The front cover is opened during printing 0112 Duplex cover open The duplex cover is opened during printing F 0113 Paper conveying cover open The paper conveying cover is opened during printing E 0114 BR conveying unit open The BR conveying unit is opened during printing J 0115 BR eject cover open The BR eject cover is opened during printing J 0131 MP lift sensor...

Page 308: ...cassette 5 SM feed sensor SMFS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 side multi tray L 0518 Multiple sheets in duplex sec tion Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section F 0519 Multiple sheets in MP tray MP feed sensor MPFS does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray D 0523 No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn on ...

Page 309: ...or MS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 paper feeder large capacity feeder E 1315 Middle sensor MS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 side deck E 1502 Paper conveying sensor non arrival jam Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 B 1503 Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder...

Page 310: ...from cassette 4 paper feeder E 2603 PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 PFPCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 large capacity feeder C 2604 PF paper conveying sensor 1 PFPCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 large capacity feeder C 2613 PF paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 PFPCS1 does not turn off ...

Page 311: ...sensor RS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray E 4011 Registration sensor stay jam Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 E 4012 Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 E 4013 Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder E 4014 Registration sensor RS do...

Page 312: ...nsor LPS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray E 4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 E 4112 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 E 4113 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder E 4114 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed fro...

Page 313: ...or FUES does not turn on dur ing paper feed from MP tray E 4211 Fuser eject sensor stay jam Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off dur ing paper feed from cassette 1 G 4212 Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off dur ing paper feed from cassette 2 G 4213 Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off dur ing paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder G 4214 Fuser eject sensor FU...

Page 314: ...ring paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder F 4314 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 paper feeder large capacity feeder F 4315 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 side deck F 4319 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray F 4401 Duplex sensor 2 non arrival jam Duplex senso...

Page 315: ...US2 does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray F 4601 Eject full sensor non arrival jam Eject full sensor EFS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1 G 4602 Eject full sensor EFS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 G 4603 Eject full sensor EFS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder G 4604 Eject full sensor EFS does not ...

Page 316: ...nsor EFS does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray G 4701 Switchback sensor non arrival jam Switchback sensor SBS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1 G 4702 Switchback sensor SBS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 G 4703 Switchback sensor SBS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder G 4704 Switchback sensor SBS does...

Page 317: ...off during paper feed from MP tray I 4901 BR conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam BR conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1 G 4902 BR conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 G 4903 BR conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder G 4904 BR conveying sensor 1 BRCS1...

Page 318: ... 1 BRCS1 does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray J 5001 BR conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam BR conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1 J 5002 BR conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 J 5003 BR conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder J 5004 BR c...

Page 319: ... J 5019 BR conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray J 5101 BR eject sensor non arrival jam BR eject sensor BRES does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1 J 5102 BR eject sensor BRES does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2 J 5103 BR eject sensor BRES does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder J 5104 BR eject sensor BRES does ...

Page 320: ...r entry sensor DFPES turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine 4000 sheet finisher K 6001 DF paper entry sensor DFPES turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine 1000 sheet finisher K 6020 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation 4000 sheet finisher K 6021 DF front cover is opened during operation 1000 sheet finisher K 6041 DF top cover ...

Page 321: ...thin specified time of its turning on K 6300 DF middle eject sensor non arrival jam DF middle eject sensor DFMES does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor DFPES turning on 4000 sheet finisher K 6301 DF middle eject sensor DFMES does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor DFPES turning on 1000 sheet finisher K 6310 DF middle eject sensor stay jam DF middle ...

Page 322: ...rum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor DFDRS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on K 6710 Center folding unit stay jam During paper conveying to center folding unit DF drum sensor DFDRS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on K 6810 DF side registration sensor 1 stay jam DF side registration sensor 1 DFSRS1 is not turned off within specified time after driving the...

Page 323: ...is not turned on within specified time since three fold operation starts K 7310 CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation CF eject sensor CFES is not turned off within specified time of its turning on K 7400 CF side registration sensor 2 non arrival jam CF side registration sensor 2 CFSRS2 is not turned on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 2 CFSRM2 K 750...

Page 324: ...peration starts H 9005 No original feed 2 DP lift sensor 1 DPLS1 does not turn on within specified time of the lift plate rising H 9006 DP switchback jam 3 DP eject sensor DPES is not turned on within specified time since original switchback operation starts H 9007 DP switchback jam 4 DP eject sensor DPES is not turned off within specified time since original switchback operation starts H 9008 No ...

Page 325: ... 9400 DP timing sensor non arrival jam DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn on within specified time of DP feed sensor DPFS turning on H 9410 DP timing sensor stay jam DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn off within specified time of DP feed sensor DPFS turning off H 9500 DP switchback sensor non arrival jam DP switchback sensor DPSBS does not turn on within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS t...

Page 326: ... problem is detected the machine stops print ing and display an error message on the operation panel An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to service personnel and a four digit error code indicating the type of the error Figure 1 4 3 Machine failure Call service C Error occurred Turn the main power switch off and on C ...

Page 327: ... control PWB and check for correct operation 0100 Backup memory device error Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 41 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 41 0120 MAC address data error For data in which the MAC address is invalid Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect o...

Page 328: ...contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection the signal cable for CIS and the main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 41 0640 Hard disk error The hard disk cannot be accessed Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the con...

Page 329: ...ror High capacity data transfer between the FAX control PWB and the main PWB of the machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the speci fied times Improper installa tion FAX control PWB Reinstall the FAX control PWB Defective FAX con trol PWB or main PWB Replace the FAX control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 41 0920 Fax file system error...

Page 330: ...ect operation see page 1 5 47 1010 Lift motor 1 error After cassette 1 is inserted lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected 5 times successively The lock signal of the motor is detected continuously for 1 s This error is detected 5 times successively Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it ...

Page 331: ...for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 1030 PF lift motor 1 error paper feeder After cassette 3 is inserted PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected 5 times successively During driving the motor the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 1 s or more 5 times succes sively However the first 1 s after motor is turned on is excluded from detection Defect...

Page 332: ...ver the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB YC7 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Chec...

Page 333: ...eder communica tion error A communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succession Improper installa tion paper feeder Follow installation instruction carefully again Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF main PWB YC13 and engine PWB YC19 Defective engi...

Page 334: ... or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum motor and feed PWB 1 YC9 Feed PWB 1 YC2 and engine PWB YC5 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor Replace the drum mo...

Page 335: ...or Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Transfer motor and relay PWB YC6 Relay PWB YC5 and feed PWB 1 YC13 Feed PWB 1 YC1 and engine PWB YC6 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective fuser motor Replace the f...

Page 336: ...feed motor and SD main PWB YC16 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective SD paper feed motor Replace the SD paper feed motor Defective SD main PWB Replace the SD main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder 2810 Innter waste toner motor error Initialized when...

Page 337: ...n 5 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB YC6 CCD PWB YC2 and ISC PWB YC9 ISC PWB YC3 and main PWB YC11 Defective LED lamp PWB Replace the LED lamp PWB and check for correct operation Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct ope...

Page 338: ...within the connector cable If none replace the cable CIS and DPSHD PWB YC2 DPSHD PWB YC3 and DP relay PWB YC2 Defective CIS Replace the CIS and check for correct oper ation Defective DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB and check for correct operation Defective DP relay PWB Replace the DP relay PWB and check for correct operation 3500 Communication error between scanner and ASIC An error code is detect...

Page 339: ... for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 4011 Polygon motor steady state error After polygon motor is stabi lized the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Polygon motor and engine PWB YC15 Defective polygon motor Replace ...

Page 340: ...d check for correct operation see page 1 5 52 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser thermistor 1 does not reach 100 C 212 F even after 30 s during warming up The detected temperature of fuser thermistor 1 does not reach the specified tempera ture ready indication temper ature for 420 s in warming up after re...

Page 341: ...PWB YC26 Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 40 Defective triac See page 1 4 40 Broken fuser thermistor 1 wire Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 39 Fuser thermostat triggered Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 39 Defective fuser heater Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 39 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 6040 Fuser heater error The ...

Page 342: ...than 90 C 194 F was observed at the fuser thermistor 2 when the temperature at the fuser thermistor 1 reached 160 C 320 F after warming up Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Power source PWB YC3 and fuser IH PWB YC1 Fuser IH PWB YC4 and engine PWB YC26 Deformed connec to...

Page 343: ...heck for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 6250 Abnormally low fuser thermistor 2 temperature Fuser thermistor 2 detects a temperature lower than 100 C 212 F for 1 s during ready or print Fuser thermistor 2 detects a temperature lower than 50 C 122 F for 1 s during warming up Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 40 Defective triac See page 1 4 40 Defective fuser thermistor 2 Replace the fuser uni...

Page 344: ...ow fuser thermistor 2 temperature Deformed connec tor pin If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Defective triac Remove the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac CR001 is of several Mega Ohms and not shorted see f...

Page 345: ...within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner motor and engine PWB YC27 Defective toner motor Replace the toner motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 7101 Toner sensor error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector A...

Page 346: ...ctive engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 7231 Short circuited LSU therm istor The sensor input sampling is less than 69 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB YC3 LSU relay PWB YC2 and engin...

Page 347: ...e smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective toner hopper sensor Replace the toner hopper sensor Defective toner hopper motor Replace the toner hopper motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 7401 Developer unit type mis match error Absence of the developer unit is detected Defective conn...

Page 348: ... Feed PWB 1 YC2 and engine PWB YC5 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 7800 Broken outer temperature sensor wire The device did not respond for more than 5 ms during read ing in 5 times Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the...

Page 349: ...eading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit and front PWB YC7 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC8 Defective devel oper unit Replace th...

Page 350: ...ce the punch home position sensor Defective punch motor Replace the punch motor Defective PWB Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8020 Punch motor error 2 Home position is not obtained in 3 seconds after home posi tion is initialized or in standby Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for ...

Page 351: ...or DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8090 DF paddle motor error When the DF paddle motor is driven DF paddle sensor does not turn on within 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF paddle motor and DF main PWB YC15 DF paddle sensor and DF m...

Page 352: ...00 sheet finisher When the DF shift motor 1 is driven DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on within 160 ms Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF shift motor 1 and DF main PWB YC14 DF shift sensor 1 and DF main PWB YC23 Defective DF shift sensor 1 Replace the DF shift sensor ...

Page 353: ...ay upper sur face sensor does not turn on within 20 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC16 DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB YC22 DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB YC21 YC13 Defective connec tor cable or poor...

Page 354: ...1 or DF tray upper surface sensor Defective DF tray motor Replace the DF tray motor Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8160 DF tray motor error 3 When the main tray has descended DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on within 20 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity w...

Page 355: ...e DF side registration motor 1 Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8180 DF side registration motor 1 error 2 JAM6810 is detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF side registration motor 1 and DF mai...

Page 356: ...ce DF side registration motor 2 Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8200 DF side registration motor 2 error 2 JAM6910 is detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF side registration motor 2 and DF ma...

Page 357: ...e DF slide motor Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8230 DF staple motor error 1 Staple JAM DF has been detected twice in a row The home position could not be detected in 600 ms since the motor was driven after jam was detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for cont...

Page 358: ...or contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC16 DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB YC23 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace t...

Page 359: ...ontact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable CF adjustment motor 1 2 and CF main PWB YC10 CF adjustment sensor 1 2 and CF main PWB YC20 Defective CF adjustment sensor 1 2 Replace CF adjustment sensor 1 2 Defective CF adjustment motor 1 2 Replace CF adjustment motor 1 2 Defective CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB a...

Page 360: ...sor 1 Replace CF side registration sensor 1 Defective CF side registration motor 1 Replace CF side registration motor 1 Defective CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation 8360 CF main motor error 4000 sheet finisher During driving the motor lock signal is detected for 1 s con tinuously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Al...

Page 361: ... con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Punch slide motor and punch PWB YC3 Punch PWB YC1 and DF main PWB YC7 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Punch slide...

Page 362: ...onveying motor and MB main PWB YC5 MB home position sensor and MB main PWB YC2 Defective MB home position sen sor Replace the MB home position sensor Defective MB con veying motor Replace the MB conveying motor Defective MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB and check for correct operation 8520 MB conveying motor error 2 4000 sheet finisher When standby operation MB home position sensor does not tur...

Page 363: ...nnector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF main PWB YC7 and engine PWB YC18 Improper installa tion EEPROM Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8930 Center folding unit backup error 4000 sheet finisher Read and write data does not match 3 times in suc...

Page 364: ...Defective DP lift sensor 1 Replace the DP lift sensor 1 Defective DP lift motor Replace the DP lift motor Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation 9050 DP lift motor going down error When the DP lift motor is driven DP lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 1500 pulse Three recovery times The above has been detected 5 times Defective connec tor cable or poor con...

Page 365: ... check for correct opera tion Defective DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB and check for correct operation 9100 Coin vender control PWB error Communication error has been detected at the coin mec of the coin vender control PWB Defective coin vender control PWB Replace the coin mec 9110 Coin vender error Communication error has been detected in connection with the coin mec and the rejector Rejector in...

Page 366: ...ender change Yen 500 Change is empty despite change is enough Coin jam in the change tube Check visually and remedy Poor contact in the connector Check if the change empty sensor is intact Defective change empty sensor Replace the coin mec Defective coin vender control PWB Replace the coin mec 9160 Coin vender pay out error Coin is paid out despite the pay out motor is determined not active Defect...

Page 367: ...nd scanner engine Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 41 Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation F050 Print engine ROM check sum error Defective engine software Install the engine software Defective engine PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If t...

Page 368: ...ther 9 Spots are printed 10 Image is blurred See page 1 4 67 See page 1 4 68 See page 1 4 68 See page 1 4 68 See page 1 4 68 11 The leading edge of the image is con sistently mis aligned with the original 12 The leading edge of the image is spo radically mis aligned with the original 13 Paper is wrin kled 14 Offset occurs 15 Part of image is missing See page 1 4 69 See page 1 4 69 See page 1 4 69 ...

Page 369: ... see page 1 5 52 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 47 Defective developer bias output Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC17 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 52 Defective engin...

Page 370: ...main PWB YC11 Defective exposure lamp Replace the LED lamp PWB see page 1 5 19 Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB see page 1 5 41 The laser is activated simultane ously for all colors Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 24 Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Insufficient toner If the display shows...

Page 371: ...e developer unit if any foreign matter see page 1 5 28 Dirty transfer belt Clean the transfer belt Replace the transfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 35 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Dirty LSU slit glasses Perform the laser scanner cleaning Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Print example Causes Check procedures...

Page 372: ... exposure lamp Replace the LED unit see page 1 5 19 Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh Refer to operation guide Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 29 Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 29 Flawed developer roller Replace the de...

Page 373: ...le clutch registration clutch or duplex clutch operating incor rectly 35 ppm model Check the installation of the clutch If it operates incor rectly replace it Paper feed clutch middle motor registration motor or duplex motor operating incor rectly 45 ppm model 55 ppm model Check the installation of the clutch or motor If it operates incorrectly replace it Print example Causes Check procedures corr...

Page 374: ...ransfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 35 Dirt on the back surface of the contact glass and scanner mirror Clean the contact glass and scanner mirror Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications replace paper Flawed heat roller or press roller Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 39 Defective pressure springs...

Page 375: ...ntenance item U067 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 50 Original is not placed cor rectly Place the original correctly Paper is not placed correctly Place the paper correctly Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures The device is installed in an altitude greater than 1500 m sea level 35 ppm model Run maintenance mode U140 and turn both AC Calib and Hi...

Page 376: ...rs Check for broken gears and replace if any 3 Defective motor Replace the MP lift motor 4 Defective PWB Replace the relay PWB feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 47 3 Scanner motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Sca...

Page 377: ... engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 7 Eject motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Eject motor and front PWB YC5 Front PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC7 2 Defective drive trans mission system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoo...

Page 378: ...front PWB YC5 Front PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC7 2 Defective motor Replace the developer fan motor 1 or 2 3 Defective PWB Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 12 Exhaust fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the...

Page 379: ...motor 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 47 18 Controller fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Controller fan motor and main PWB YC23 2 Defective motor Replace the controller fan motor 3 Defective ...

Page 380: ...o check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable MP paper feed clutch and relay PWB YC3 Relay PWB YC12 and feed PWB 1 YC17 Feed PWB 1 YC1 and engine PWB YC6 2 Defective clutch Replace the MP paper feed clutch 3 Defective PWB Replace the relay PWB feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 47 24 Registration clutch does not operate 35 ppm model ...

Page 381: ...ct in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Pickup solenoid 1 2 and feed PWB 2 YC8 Feed PWB 2 YC1 and engine PWB YC4 2 Defective solenoid Replace the pickup solenoid 1 or 2 3 Defective PWB Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 29 Feedshift solenoid does not operate 1 Defect...

Page 382: ...PWB Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 47 33 The size of paper on the cassette is not displayed cor rectly 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Paper length switch 1 2 and feed PWB 2 YC3 Paper width switch 1 2 and feed PWB 2 ...

Page 383: ...is played when the paper conveying unit is closed 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 YC15 Feed PWB 1 YC4 and power source PWB YC12 2 Defective switch Replace the paper conveying unit switch 38 A message indicat ing cover open is...

Page 384: ...ropyl alcohol Defective registration motor installation 45 ppm 55 ppm model Defective registration clutch installation 35 ppm model Check visually and remedy if necessary 3 Skewed paper feed Paper width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the paper width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary 4 Multiple sheets of paper are fed Check if the paper is excessively curled Change ...

Page 385: ...eck if the following clutches are installed correctly Paper feed clutch 1 2 Assist clutch 1 2 1 Paper conveying clutch MP paper feed clutch Registration clutch 2 Middle clutch 2 Duplex clutch 1 2 2 1 45 ppm 55 ppm model only 2 35 ppm model only Check visually and remedy if necessary Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures ...

Page 386: ...er is properly shared 1103 Destined host folder and or file names are invalid 1 Check illegal characters are not contained within these names 2 Check the name of the folder and files conform with the naming syntax 3 Confirm destined host and folder 1105 SMB protocol is not enabled 1 Confirm device s SMB protocols 2101 Login to the host has failed 1 Confirm destined host 2 Confirm that the LAN cabl...

Page 387: ...onfirm device s network parameters 5 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 6 Check the FTP server name 2102 Access to the FTP server has failed Connection timeout 1 Check the FTP server name 2 Check the FTP port number 3 Confirm device s network parameters 4 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 5 Check the FTP server name 2103 The server cannot establish commun...

Page 388: ...otocols 1106 Sender s address is not specified 1 Confirm device s SMTP protocols 2101 Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed 1 Check the SMTP POP3 server name 2 Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device 3 Check the SMTP POP3 port number 4 Confirm device s network parameters 5 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 6 Check the SMTP POP3 server 2102 Conne...

Page 389: ...t 1 Confirm device s network parameters 1 3101 SMTP POP3 server responded with an error 1 Confirm device s network parameters 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 3 Check the SMTP POP3 server 3201 No SMTP authentication is found 1 Check the SMTP server The device supports SMTP authentication services including CRAM MD5 DIGEST MD5 PLAIN and LOGIN Code Contents Check procedures ...

Page 390: ...n errors start with an E indica tion followed by five digits The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause while the lower two indicate the detailed classification Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits Figure 1 4 5 Error code U X X X X X Detailed classification of error code General classification of ...

Page 391: ... transmission in V 34 mode refer to P 1 4 92 U017XX error code table U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during reception in V 34 mode refer to P 1 4 92 U018XX error code table U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started U03200 In interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception data was not stored in the box specified ...

Page 392: ...0 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit ID s did not match the rejected FAX number s did match or the destination receiver did not return its phone number U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match the rejected numbers did match or the machine in question did not acknowled...

Page 393: ...ddress based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subad dress box was not registered U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID s did not agree with while the destination transmitter is in password check transmission or restricted trans mission U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registere...

Page 394: ...f command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01028 T5 time out was detected during ECM transmission ECM U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal ECM U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS NULL signal U01092 During trans...

Page 395: ...ocol U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal short protocol U01160 During message reception transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line U01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message recep...

Page 396: ...alent device training For example INFO0 B Bbar A Abar for polling reception probing tone was not detected U01810 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 primary channel equivalent device training For example S Sbar PP TRN was not detected U01820 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T ...

Page 397: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 4 93 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 398: ...en removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the cables caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient tem...

Page 399: ...lows A black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container otherwise it is a counterfeit Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Figure 1 5 2 Validation viewer Validation viewer Br...

Page 400: ... feed unit Procedure Remove the primary paper feed unit 1 Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out completely 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Open the right lower cover 4 Remove the strap and then remove the right lower cover Figure 1 5 3 Paper conveying unit Right lower cover Strap ...

Page 401: ...cover 7 Remove three screws B and then remove the right lower rear cover Figure 1 5 4 8 Open the handle cover 9 Remove three screws 10 Unhook the hook and then remove the right lower front cover Figure 1 5 5 Right middle rear cover Screw A Screws B Right lower rear cover Handle cover Screws Screw Hook Right lower front cover Right lower front cover ...

Page 402: ...rimary paper feed unit 14 Remove the primary paper feed unit Use the specific primary paper feed unit depending on model 35 ppm or 45 ppm 55 ppm Figure 1 5 7 Connector Wire saddle Connector Screws Screws Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit 45ppm 55ppm 30ppm ...

Page 403: ...pushing the retard release lever of the lower side when the primary paper feed unit is refitted 16 When the primary paper feed unit is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 162 Figure 1 5 8 Primary paper feed unit lower side Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Pin Pin Driving coupler Driving coupler ...

Page 404: ... 3 Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley 2 Remove four stop rings Figure 1 5 9 3 Slide the paper feed pulley shaft 4 Remove the joint and three bushes 5 Remove the spring and forwarding pul ley holder assembly Figure 1 5 10 Stop ring Primary paper feed unit Stop rings Stop ring Joint Bush Paper feed pulley shaft Bush Bush Spring Forwarding pulley holder assembly ...

Page 405: ...ectly align it with the paper feed pulley so that the on way clutches meet each other Figure 1 5 11 8 Pull the forwarding pulley from the axis hole of forwarding pulley holder Figure 1 5 12 Primary paper feed shaft Feed gear Z30H OW Feed gear Z30H OW Oneway clutch Paper feed pulley Paper feed pulley Forwarding pulley holder Forwarding pulley Gear Axis hole Axis hole Forwarding pulley holder ...

Page 406: ...warding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 13 Refit the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley to the pri mary paper feed unit 14 When the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 162 Figure 1 5 14 Hole Hole Primary lower plate Spring Retard holder Retard holder Axis hole ...

Page 407: ...paration pulley while pushing the retard release lever 6 Clean or replace the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 7 Refit the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley to the pri mary paper feed unit 8 When the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 162 Figure 1 5...

Page 408: ...re 1 Pull the paper conveying unit out 2 Open the MP tray 3 Remove four screws Figure 1 5 17 4 Unhook eight hooks and then remove the right cover and DU cover assembly Figure 1 5 18 Screw MP tray Screw Paper conveying unit Right cover Right cover DU cover assembly Hooks Hook Hooks ...

Page 409: ...be sure to fit in the positioning hole that was previously used Figure 1 5 19 8 Remove the MP tray When refitting the MP tray insert it in the MP tray paper feed unit side by turning the lift arm Figure 1 5 20 Installation hole Connector Connector Wire saddle Wire saddle MP tray Lift arm MP tray MP tray paper feed unit ...

Page 410: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 5 13 9 Remove two screws 10 Remove the MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1 5 21 MP tray paper feed unit Screw Screw MP tray paper feed unit ...

Page 411: ...hooks and then remove the Du lower guide Remove the DU lower guide easy by bending the top base that the hook is hooking because the hook of the DU lower guide lacks flexibility Figure 1 5 22 3 Remove the stop ring A and then slide the driving joint 4 Slide the bush A 5 Remove the stop ring B and then remove the bush B Figure 1 5 23 DU lower guide Top base MP tray paper feed unit Hook Hooks Stop r...

Page 412: ...stop rings 9 Pull the feed MPF shaft out 10 Remove two bushes one way gear Z30R and MP paper feed pulley To refit the one way gear Z30R mount the gear in the correct direction as shown Hook Hook Top base Top base Spring Spring Feed holder assembly Feed MFP shaft Stop ring Stop ring MP paper feed pulley Bush Bush Oneway gear Z30R Oneway clutch Oneway gear Z30R ...

Page 413: ...pickup gear Z30R and MP for warding pulley out from the pickup MFP shaft Figure 1 5 26 Detaching the MP separation pulley 13 Unhook two hooks and then remove the middle guide Figure 1 5 27 Feed gear Z26H Axis hole Axis hole Feed MPF holder Pickup gear Z30R MP forwarding pulley Pickup MFP shaft Middle guide Hook Hook ...

Page 414: ...e the spring 15 Release the uniting of joint by sliding the retard holder assembly Figure 1 5 28 16 Remove the retard holder assembly by turning it as shown Figure 1 5 29 Spring Joint Retard holder assembly Retard holder assembly ...

Page 415: ...ed pulley and MP sepa ration pulley 21 Refit the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit 22 When the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pul ley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 162 Figure 1 5 30 Torque limiter Stop ring Stop ring Bush Bush Retard MPF shaft Retard holder ...

Page 416: ...iding plate and reflector Do not clean it using a cleaning cloth that adheres the fiber easily Figure 1 5 31 Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the docu ment processor 2 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU front cover 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover Figure 1 5 32 LED mount assembly Reflector Diffusion seat Diffusion seat Light guiding plate White LED LED lamp PW...

Page 417: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 5 20 4 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU rear cover Figure 1 5 33 5 Remove the platen 6 Peels two films off Figure 1 5 34 Screw ISU rear cover Screw Platen Film Film Film Film ...

Page 418: ...bly 12 Check or replace the LED mount assembly and refit all the removed parts When cleaning the reflector the light guiding plate and the diffusion sheet of the LED mount assembly clean it by air blow Not to leave the hair dust 13 When the LED mount assembly is replaced perform maintenance mode U411 Adjusting the scanner automati cally see page 1 3 139 Figure 1 5 36 FFC guide Hook Hook Hook FFC c...

Page 419: ...move the platen see page 1 5 19 3 Remove six screws and then remove the lens cover Figure 1 5 37 4 Remove the connector 5 Remove the FFC from the FFC connec tor with a lock When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up see page 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 38 Lens cover Screw Screws Screw CCD PWB FFC connector with a lock Connector FFC ...

Page 420: ...position ing line b of same number on frame side The rear and front of machine Match the edge e of ISU to the posi tioning line d on frame side 8 Fix the ISU as before with four screws 9 Refit all the removed parts 10 When replacing the new ISU performs maintenance mode U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically see page 1 3 139 Figure 1 5 40 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 4 2468 13579 Screw Screw Screw ISU Scre...

Page 421: ...6 2 Remove two screws 3 Remove the inner cover by releasing the hook through the round access Figure 1 5 41 4 Remove two fixed screws of the con tainer guide 5 Pull the container guide out and remove the guide Figure 1 5 42 Screws Hook Round access Inner cover Screw Screw Container guide Container guide ...

Page 422: ...1 Performs maintenance mode U930 checking clearing the charger roller count and checking the counter value see page 1 3 171 2 Performs maintenance mode U119 Setting the drum see page 1 3 73 3 Performs maintenance mode U930 checking clearing the charger roller count and checking the counter value see page 1 3 171 4 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 154 5 Performs maintenance m...

Page 423: ...ver 2 Remove toner container 3 Remove the waste toner box tray by lift ing upwards and from the right side Figure 1 5 45 4 Remove the screw and then open the connector cover 5 Release the wire saddle 6 Remove the connector Figure 1 5 46 1 2 Waste toner box tray Connector cover Screw Connector cover Connector Wire saddle ...

Page 424: ...e the inner unit 9 Release the lock by pushing the fixed levers at the right and left of inner unit 10 Close the toner replenishment shutter of inner unit Figure 1 5 48 Screw Screw Screws Inner unit Inner unit Inner unit Toner replenishment shutter Fixed lever Fixed lever Fixed lever ...

Page 425: ...eveloper unit 6 Check or replace the developer unit and refit all the removed parts 7 When replacing the new developer unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U140 AC calibration for 45 ppm 55 ppm model only see page 1 3 80 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 154 3 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 138 Figure 1 5 50 C...

Page 426: ...itting the drum unit Procedure 1 Remove the inner unit see page 1 5 26 2 Remove the developer unit see page 1 5 28 3 Pull the paper conveying unit out 4 Remove the connector 5 Remove the screw Figure 1 5 51 Connector Drum unit Drum unit Screw ...

Page 427: ... drum setup see page 1 3 73 2 Performs maintenance mode U140 AC calibration for 55 ppm model only see page 1 3 80 3 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 154 4 Performs maintenance mode U412 Adjusting the uneven density see page 1 3 146 5 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 154 6 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 ...

Page 428: ...arger roller unit and refit all the removed parts When refitting the charger roller unit that must hook the hook certain by operating the MC lock lever after insert ing the charger roller unit until bumping 4 When replacing the new charger roller unit proceed as follows Performs maintenance mode U930 clearing the charger roller count see page 1 3 171 Figure 1 5 53 Charger roller unit Charger rolle...

Page 429: ...pin at the back 1 and hook the hooks in posi tion Figure 1 5 55 Machine Procedure 1 Remove the developer unit and the drum unit see page 1 5 28 1 5 29 2 Pull out the paper conveying unit 3 Remove the two screws holding the feed guide plate 4 Clean the back of the paper conveying plate 5 Check that the toner outlet to which the cooling duct is joined in the developer unit is not clogged with toner ...

Page 430: ...ut 2 Remove three screws 3 Unhook three hooks and then remove the right front cover Figure 1 5 57 4 Unhook two hooks and then remove the conveying inner cover from the paper conveying unit Figure 1 5 58 Paper conveying unit Screws Screw Hook Hook Hook Right front cover Right front cover Conveying inner cover Hook Paper conveying unit Hook ...

Page 431: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 5 34 5 Remove four screws 6 Remove the paper conveying unit by lifting upward Figure 1 5 59 Paper conveying unit Paper conveying unit Screws Screws ...

Page 432: ...ing rear middle cover 3 Remove the connector Figure 1 5 60 4 Unhook the two hooks by the tip of a screwdriver though the hole and then remove the front and rear transfer hold ers Figure 1 5 61 Paper conveying unit Screw Screw Screw Conveying rear middle cover Connector Screw Screw Hole Hole Hole Hole Rear transfer holder Front transfer holder Hook Hook Hook Hook ...

Page 433: ...ansfer belt unit into the square hole on the conveying base 7 When replacing the new transfer belt unit proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U127 clearing the transfer counter see page 1 3 74 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 154 3 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 138 Figure 1 5 62 Transfer belt unit Tension spring P...

Page 434: ...h sides of the conveying guide Wipe the conveying guide with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning Do not touch the photoconductor drum Figure 1 5 63 Separator 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the cleaning brush blue col ored 3 As shown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator Figure 1 5 64 ...

Page 435: ...Clean the regist cleaner R Figure 1 5 65 Left regist cleaner 1 Remove the developer unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 29 3 Clean the cleaner unit by pulling out the regist cleaner L Figure 1 5 66 Right registration roller Regist cleaner R Regist cleaner L ...

Page 436: ...on 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Procedure 1 Pull out the paper conveying unit 2 Remove the screw and then the fuser wire cover 3 Remove two connectors Figure 1 5 67 Fuser wire cover Screw Connector Connector Paper conveying unit ...

Page 437: ...d parts 6 When replacing the new fuser unit pro ceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U167 clearing the fuser count see page 1 3 90 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 155 3 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 138 Figure 1 5 68 Screw M4x12 Fuser unit Screw M4x12 ...

Page 438: ...roller lid 3 Remove two screws 4 Unhook six hooks and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 5 69 5 Release seven wire saddles on the con troller box 6 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 5 70 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddles Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 439: ... b When connecting an FFC furnished with the protrusions at both ends address the side with a blue colored tape towards the locking lever insert the FFC into the connector until the pro trusions are recessed and raise the lock lever to lock the FFC see figure c a b c FFC Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever FFC FFC YC25 YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 YC12 YC21 YC17 Controller box State of lo...

Page 440: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 5 43 Figure 1 5 71 9 Remove five screws 10 Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box Figure 1 5 72 Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw Controller box ...

Page 441: ...nector with a lock YC9 YC1 BLACK with a lock YC2 BLUE with a lock When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting down the lock lever see page 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 73 YC23 YC27 YC32 YC8 YC9 YC2 YC1 BLACK BLUE Controller box Main PWB Main PWB FFC connector with a lock ...

Page 442: ...holder Figure 1 5 74 16 Remove two screws and then remove the upper controller box cover and DP relay PWB 17 Remove five screws from the main PWB Figure 1 5 75 Wire holder Wire holder Screws Fan mootor holder Controller box Wire saddle Screws Main PWB Main PWB DP raley PWB Upper controller box cover Screws Screw Screw ...

Page 443: ...en replacing the main PWB remove the following devices from the main PWB and then reattach it to the new main PWB see page 1 6 3 EEPROM YC14 Code DIMM YS4 Memory DDR YS1 Exchange EEPROM YC14 and code DIMM YC4 by the set Figure 1 5 76 YS4 YC14 YS1 BLACK BLUE BK WH Main PWB Main PWB Projections for ground Network connector EEPROM YC14 Code DIMM YS4 Memory DDR YS1 Network connector ...

Page 444: ...FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting down the lock lever see page 1 5 42 When removing the FFC from the YC 46 remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever When connecting an FFC furnished with the protrusions at both ends address the side with a blue colored tape towards the locking lever insert the FFC into the connector until the pro trusi...

Page 445: ... engine PWB 5 Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U100 from the engine PWB and then reattach it to the new engine PWB Figure 1 5 78 U100 Hook Screws Screws EEPROM U100 Engine PWB Engine PWB Engine PWB Board support Engine PWB Screws ...

Page 446: ...es 5 Remove the following nine connectors and three tabs from the power source PWB YC1 YC3 TB1 TB2 TB3 YC4 YC5 YC14 YC11 YC9 YC13 YC10 6 Remove 22 pin relay connector and 4 pin relay connector Figure 1 5 80 Connector Wire saddles YC3 YC14 YC11 YC9 YC13 YC10 YC1 YC4 YC6 YC5 TB3 TB1 TB2 Power source assembly Power source PWB Power source PWB Wire saddles Wire saddles 22 pin relay connector 4P pin re...

Page 447: ...LL 2LJ 2LH 2 1 5 50 7 Remove two screws 8 Remove the toner box Figure 1 5 81 9 Remove two screws 10 Remove the power source assembly Figure 1 5 82 Screw Screw Toner box Power source assembly Screw Screw ...

Page 448: ...ight screws 12 Unhook the hook of the board support and then remove the power source PWB 13 Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 83 Screw Screw Screws Screws Board support Power source PWB ...

Page 449: ...abs from high voltage PWB Figure 1 5 84 3 Remove four screws 4 Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and then remove the high voltage PWB 5 Check or replace the high voltage PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 85 Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Tab Tab Tab Tab High voltage PWB High voltage PWB Screws PWB spacers Screws High voltage PWB ...

Page 450: ... out 2 Remove the screw from the right upper cover Figure 1 5 86 3 Open the front cover 4 Remove the screw and then remove the fan cover 5 Unhook three hooks and then remove the front upper right cover Figure 1 5 87 Screw Right upper cover Paper conveying unit Screw Front right upper cover Hooks Fan cover ...

Page 451: ... Remove the screw and then remove the operation panel cover Figure 1 5 88 7 Remove two screws and then remove the USB wire connector Figure 1 5 89 Screw Operation panel cover Operation panel cover Screws USB wire connector ...

Page 452: ... upward 10 Release two wire saddles 11 Remove four connectors from the oper ation PWB 12 Remove the wire holder 13 Remove the operation panel unit Figure 1 5 91 Screws Screws Wire holder Connector Operation panel unit Operation panel unit Connectors Connector Wire saddles Operation PWB ...

Page 453: ...ock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 92 15 Remove four screws and then remove the operation PWB 16 Check or replace the operation PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 93 Connectors FFC connector with a lock FFC Operation PWB Connectors FFC Operation PWB Screws Screw Screw ...

Page 454: ...ven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 5 94 2 Remove nine screws 3 Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover 4 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 39 Figure 1 5 95 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screw Screw Screws Screws ...

Page 455: ... the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 5 96 7 Remove the screw 8 Unhook two hooks and then remove the right middle rear cover Figure 1 5 97 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook Right upper cover Screw Right middle rear cover Screw ...

Page 456: ...crews and the remove the fuser heater PWB cover Figure 1 5 98 10 Release two wire saddles 11 Remove the connector from the fuser heater PWB Figure 1 5 99 Screws Screw Screw Fuser heater PWB cover Fuser heater PWB Wire saddles Connector ...

Page 457: ... the connector YC27 from feed PWB 1 Figure 1 5 100 14 Remove three screws 15 Unhook two hooks and then remove heater box assembly Figure 1 5 101 Wire holder Wire holder Feed PWB 1 Connector YC27 Heater box assembly Heater box assembly Hook Hook Screw Screws ...

Page 458: ...wo connectors 17 Remove four screws and then remove fuser heater PWB 18 Check or replace the fuser heater PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 102 Screw Screws Screw Connector Heater box assembly Connector Fuser heater PWB ...

Page 459: ...he feed PWB 1 assembly see page 1 5 64 5 Remove the connector 6 Release the wire saddle Figure 1 5 103 7 Remove three screws 8 Remove the drum drive unit Do not have a shaft part alone when you carry drum drive unit Have the housing Put support on the tip of the shaft so that the shaft may become the horizon tal when you put drum drive unit on the table etc Figure 1 5 104 Connector Wire saddle Scr...

Page 460: ...per cover and the rear lower cover see page 1 5 57 2 Remove the connector 3 Release the wire saddle 4 Remove two screws and then remove the developer drive unit 5 Check or replace the developer drive unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 105 Screws Developer drive unit Wire saddle Connector ...

Page 461: ...C18 YC19 YC20 YC27 YC26 YC3 YC17 YC14 YC10 YC16 YC13 YC12 YC23 YC25 YC15 YC11 YC5 YC4 YC1 FFC connector with a lock YC2 FFC connector with a lock YC8 YC9 When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting down the lock lever see page 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 107 Wire holder Wire holder Wire saddle Wire saddle Wire holder Feed PWB 1 assembly Wire holder Wire ...

Page 462: ...removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 108 6 Remove three screws 7 Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly Figure 1 5 109 Engine PWB FFC connector with a lock YC4 FFC FFC connector with a lock YC1 Feed PWB 2 Screw Screw Screw Feed PWB 1 assembly Screw Screw Screw Feed PWB 1 assembly ...

Page 463: ... screws 10 Remove the fuser drive unit Figure 1 5 110 Detaching the feed drive unit 11 Remove three wire holders from the feed 2 FFC guide Figure 1 5 111 Fuser drive unit Fuser drive unit Connector Screw Screw Screw Wire holder Wire holders Feed 2 FFC guide ...

Page 464: ...d then remove the feed 2 FFC guide Figure 1 5 112 13 Remove the following five connectors from the feed PWB 2 YC7 YC8 YC3 YC5 YC6 Figure 1 5 113 Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw YC7 YC8 YC5 YC6 YC3 Feed PWB 2 Feed PWB 2 ...

Page 465: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 1 1 5 68 14 Remove three screws 15 Remove the feed drive unit Figure 1 5 114 Feed drive unit Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw 45ppm 55ppm 35ppm Screw ...

Page 466: ...ct the connector yellow to the connector of paper feed clutch 1 on stamp YELLOW side as before when removing the connector of the paper feed clutch as the check of the feed drive unit etc Figure 1 5 115 Feed drive unit Connector Yellow Connector Paper feed clutch 1 Marking YELLOW Paper feed clutch 2 ...

Page 467: ...dure 1 Remove the power source assembly see page 1 5 49 2 Remove the connector each 3 Remove two screws each 4 Remove the lift motor 1 and 2 5 Check or replace the lift motor and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 116 Screws Connector Lift motor Lift motor 1 Lift motor 2 ...

Page 468: ...eject filter Procedure 1 Unhook the hook each and remove two eject filter units 2 Remove the eject filter from the eject cover 3 Clean or replace the eject filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 117 Eject filter unit Hook Eject filter Eject cover Hook ...

Page 469: ...aching and refitting the toner filter Procedure 1 Remove the toner filter unit while grip ping the levers 2 Clean or replace the toner filter unit and refit the filter Figure 1 5 118 Toner filter unit Levers Toner filter unit ...

Page 470: ...etaching and refitting the left filter Procedure 1 Remove the left filter cover and left filter by releasing the lever 2 Clean or replace the left filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 119 Lever Left filter cover Left filter ...

Page 471: ... 2LJ 2LH 1 5 74 4 Detaching and refitting the belt filter Procedure 1 Remove the belt filter by releasing the lever 2 Clean or replace the belt filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 120 Belt filter Lever ...

Page 472: ...L 2LJ 2LH 1 1 5 75 5 Detaching and refitting the LSU filter Procedure 1 Remove the LSU filter by releasing the lever 2 Clean or replace the LSU filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 121 LSU filter Lever ...

Page 473: ...ter and developer filter Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the drum filter and developer filter by releasing the lever 3 Clean the drum filter and developer fil ter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 122 Front cover Lever Lever Drum filter Developer filter ...

Page 474: ...form maintenance mode U917 backup data reading see page 1 3 167 2 Remove the rear upper cover see page 1 5 57 3 Release the wire saddle 4 Remove two screws Figure 1 5 123 5 Unhook two hooks and pull out the HDD bracket a little Figure 1 5 124 Screws Wire saddle HDD bracket Hook Hook ...

Page 475: ...g procedure Figure 1 5 126 1 Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved Software LANGUAGE BR JP Opt Font Opt Msg and the PDF1 7 resource The firmware is installed by switching the main power switch to ON OFF 2 Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved WeeklyTimer FMU application Installs the firmware from the applica tion screen of the system menu Refer to operation guide 11...

Page 476: ... screws and then remove the eject unit 5 Check or replace the eject unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 127 Cautions on installing the eject unit When inserting the eject unit into the device use care that the eject unit does not get in con tact with the eject guide by keeping its actua tor lifted while inserting Figure 1 5 128 Eject unit Connector Screw Screw Actuator Eject guide ...

Page 477: ... fan motor Rating label inside Exhaust fan motor Rating label inside Heater fan motor Rating label inside Eject fan motor 1 Rating label inside Eject fan motor 2 Rating label inside Fuser front fan motor 1 Rating label inside Controller fan motor Rating label inside Eject front fan motor Rating label inside Developer fan motor 1 Rating label outside Developer fan motor 2 Rating label outside Fuser...

Page 478: ... Never turn off the power switch or remove the USB flash device during upgrading 5 ROM version is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete 6 Switch off the main power switch Figure 1 6 1 7 Wait for several seconds and then remove the USB flash device from the machine 8 Turn the main power switch on 9 Perform maintenance item U000 main tenance report output and check that U019 ROM ve...

Page 479: ...ED will be blinking when rewriting is failed 6 Turn the main power switch off 7 Wait for several seconds and then remove the CF memory from the main PWB 8 Extract the firmware to download from the archive and copy to the root of the USB flash device 9 Insert the USB flash device in which the firmware was copied into the slot on the machine 10 Perform steps 4 to 7 on the previous page Figure 1 6 2 ...

Page 480: ...form the following 1 Insert the USB flash device in which the latest firmware was copied into the slot on the machine and turn power on see page P 1 6 1 2 Referring to the U000 maintenance report printed previously enter the following values U252 Setting the destination U265 Setting OEM purchaser code U278 Setting the delivery date U402 Adjusting margins of image printing U952 Maintenance mode wor...

Page 481: ...lent Mode setting 4 Run the maintenance mode for image adjustments which follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page P 1 3 154 2 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page P 1 3 154 When connecting the hard disk cables YC1 YC2 to the PWB match BLACK and BLUE marked on the PWB with the connector colors Figure 1 6 5 When connecting the USB cables Y...

Page 482: ... 5 1 6 3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U100 from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB Figure 1 6 7 U100 EEPROM Engine PWB ...

Page 483: ... of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley Figure 2 1 1 Cassette paper feed section 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 17 20 5 21 8 6 7 4 12 5 22 9 15 9 23 8 6 16 18 19 14 11 13 7 10 10 24 1 Cassette base 2 Cassette operation plate 3 Cassette 4 Forwarding pulleys 5 Paper feed pulleys 6 Separation pulleys 7 Assist rollers 8 Assist pulleys 9 Paper conveying roller 1...

Page 484: ...1_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_P0_SENS PGS1 U PGS1 L PFCL2 ASCL2 FS2 PUSOL2 LM2 PS2 LS2 CAS2_EMPTY_SENS PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS CAS2_QUANT1 CAS2_QUANT2 FEED2_SENS V FEED_CL_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 CAS2_P0_SENS YC10 1 YC8 14 YC8 15 YC8 18 YC8 21 YC3 15 YC3 16 YC3 25 YC3 28 YC4 3 YC12 1 YC6 3 YC5 3 YC1 YC4 YC3 22 YC8 23 YC4 1 YC8 11 YC8 2 YC8 3 YC8 6 YC...

Page 485: ...ime by the torque lim iter Figure 2 1 3 MP tray paper feed section 1 2 7 9 6 4 13 5 11 14 12 10 8 15 3 1 MP forwarding pulley 2 MP paper feed pulley 3 MP separate pulley 4 MP table 5 MP support Tray 6 MP paper sensor MPPS 7 Actuator MP paper sensor 8 MP lift sensor 1 MPLS1 9 MP lift sensor 2 MPLS2 10 MP paper length switch MPPLSW 11 Actuator MP paper length switch 12 MP paper width switch MPPWSW 1...

Page 486: ...EPWB YC3 5 MPPS MPF_PPR_SET MPF_CL_REM MPF_LIFT_DR_B MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG MPF_TABLE MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS YC3 3 YC3 13 MPLS2 MPPLSW MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS YC3 8 MPFS MPF_JAM_SENS YC3 11 YC3 11 YC3 11 YC2 7 YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 2 YC2 9 MPPWSW MPTSW MPLM MP PFCL YC12 YC17 YC1 YC6 ...

Page 487: ...oller to the position where the registration sensor RS is turned on and then sent to the transfer separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller Figure 2 1 5 Paper conveying section 3 4 5 8 7 6 2 9 1 1 Middle roller 2 Middle pulley 3 Left registration roller 4 Right registration roller 5 Paper conveying pulley 6 Middle sensor MS 7 Regist deflection sensor RDS 8 Ac...

Page 488: ... block diagram 35 ppm model RDS BEND_SENS YC7 5 REG_SENS YC7 12 FFED1_SENS YC8 9 RS MS RCL REG_CL_REM YC22 2 MCL MID_CL_REM YC7 14 6 5 4 3 PFM FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 3 YC2 2 YC1 YC4 YC5 42 YC2 9 EPWB FPWB2 FPWB1 ...

Page 489: ..._SENS YC7 5 REG_SENS YC7 12 FFED1_SENS YC8 9 RS MS MM MID_A YC7 2 MID_B YC7 1 MID_A YC7 4 MID_B YC7 3 RM REG_MOT_A YC25 2 REG_MOT_B YC25 1 REG_MOT_A YC25 4 REG_MOT_B YC25 3 6 5 4 3 PFM FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 3 YC2 2 YC1 YC4 YC5 42 YC2 9 EPWB FPWB2 FPWB1 ...

Page 490: ...The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Figure 2 1 8 Drum section 5 9 1 7 4 6 8 2 3 1 Drum 2 Charger roller 3 Charger cleaning roller 4 Charger case 5 Drum frame 6 Cleaning blade 7 Cleaning roller 8 D...

Page 491: ...ck diagram FRPWB EPWB CL YC8 YC2 YC5 YC2 YC16 9 YC2 1 HVPWB Drum unit Charger roller Main chager high voltage YC7 2 YC7 3 FPWB1 YC9 6 YC9 5 YC9 4 YC9 3 YC7 8 ERS_Bk_REM DC_MAIN_REM DRPWB EEP_SCL EEP_SDA EEPROM 3 4 5 6 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK DRM ...

Page 492: ...per blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner Also the toner sensor TS checks whether or not toner remains in the developer unit Figure 2 1 10 Developer section 6 5 7 1 2 9 3 4 8 1 Sleeve roller 2 Magnet roller 3 Developer screw A 4 Developer screw B 5 Developer paddle 6 Developer blade 7 Developer case 8 Developer cover 9 Toner sensor TS ...

Page 493: ...eve bias Developer unit Sleeve roller Magnet roller DEVSS SRS TS K TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_K TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL YC7 1 YC5 11 YC4 2 YC7 2 YC7 3 YC7 4 YC7 8 YC7 9 FRPWB EPWB YC8 YC2 YC5 YC2 YC17 YC1 FPWB1 YC8 5 YC8 4 YC8 3 YC8 2 3 4 5 6 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK ENCODE_Bk ROT_HP_SENS DEVM ...

Page 494: ...n electrical signal The mirror frame A and B travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frame B is half the speed of the mirror frame A Figure 2 1 12 Image scanner section 3 9 4 11 15 13 12 6 5 7 10 8 6 14 2 1 1 Mirror frame A 2 Mirror frame B 3 LED mount 4 Scanner reflector 5 Mirror A 6 Mirror B 7 ISU lens 8 CCD PWB C...

Page 495: ...Reading image data SM CCDPWB ISCPWB MPWB YC2 HP_SW ORG_SW SMOT_AP SMOT_BP SMOT_AN SMOT_BN SDA SCL VSET POW CO_SW YC8 3 YC13 2 YC3 YC11 YC4 YC25 YC5 1 YC9 YC5 2 YC5 3 YC5 4 YC6 3 YC6 4 YC6 5 YC6 9 YC14 3 CCD image sensor LLPWB ODSW HPS OSS Lens Image scanner unit Original ...

Page 496: ...ser beam is dispersed as the polygon motor PM revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum Various lenses are housed in the laser scanner unit adjust the diameter of the laser beam and focalize it at the drum sur face Figure 2 1 14 Laser scanner section 4 1 2 5 3 1 Polygon motor PM 2 f lens A 3 f lens B 4 LSU dust shield glass 5 LSU cover ...

Page 497: ...1 15 Figure 2 1 15 Image scanner unit 5 9 10 6 8 7 2 1 3 4 1 APC PWB APCPWB 2 Collimate lens 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 f lens A 6 f lens B 7 LSU dust shield glass 8 Mirror lens 9 PD lens 10 PD PWB PDPWB ...

Page 498: ... BD_Bk LSU_TH_Bk PDPWB Laser scanner unit PM TH BD LDD_CS_Bk YC3 2 YC3 3 YC3 9 YC1 29 YC1 28 YC3 2 YC3 3 YC1 22 DATA_1N_Bk DATA_1P_Bk DATA_2N_Bk YC3 25 YC3 26 YC3 28 YC1 6 YC1 5 YC1 3 DATA_2P_Bk YC3 29 YC1 2 YC2 YC11 START STOP LOCK YC15 9 YC15 10 1 2 CLK YC15 11 3 LSURPWB EPWB ...

Page 499: ...B HVPWB The toner image formed on the drum is transferred to the paper by the potential difference and the paper is discharged with the discharging brush Also with the ID sensors IDS the toner density on the transfer belt is measured Figure 2 1 17 Transfer belt unit section 1 7 9 2 5 6 3 4 1 Transfer roller 2 Idle roller 3 Drive roller 4 Transfer belt 5 Transfer rear guide 6 Charge erasing brush 7...

Page 500: ...C1 16 YC14 2 YC1 17 YC17 3 YC12 18 YC5 YC2 IDS CLSOL LPS ID_SOL_REM START STOP CLOCK LD CW CCW YC 6 5 YC 6 4 YC 6 3 YC 6 2 ID_SOL_REM REG_SENS_S REG_SENS_P REG_SENS_P REG_SENS_S LOOP_SENS LOOP_SENS YC13 5 YC13 4 YC13 3 YC5 6 YC5 7 YC5 8 YC5 9 YC13 2 TR_MOT_DIR TR_MOT_CLK TR_MOT_RDY TR_MOT_REM YC 4 2 3 4 5 6 YC 10 8 YC 10 7 YC 10 1 TRM Transfer bias Transfer roller Charge erasing brush ...

Page 501: ...fuser press spring The surface temperature of heat roller and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor FTH and controlled by the engine PWB EPWB Figure 2 1 19 Fuser section 12 13 1 3 4 8 14 5 6 7 2 10 9 11 1 Heat roller 2 Press roller 3 Fuser heater 1 FH1 4 Fuser heater 2 FH2 5 Separators 6 Fuser eject roller 7 Fuser eject pulley 8 Right fuser cover 9 Left fuser guide 10 Fuser thermistor ...

Page 502: ...agram FTH2 FTH1 FPWB1 EPWB Fuser unit FUES FH1 FH2 FTS1 FTS2 YC26 A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS GUIDE_TH EDGE_TH LIVE_OUT SH_OUT MH_OUT FHPWB YC26 B11 YC26 B15 YC1 1 2 YC1 6 YC1 4 YC6 YC1 CLOCK CW CCW 6 LD 5 START STOP YC18 4 YC18 2 YC27 2 YC27 1 YC18 3 YC18 5 4 3 FUM ...

Page 503: ...onveying section or job separator Figure 2 1 21 Eject Feed shift section 1 9 5 14 13 10 7 11 4 6 8 2 3 12 1 Middle pulley 2 Eject roller 3 Eject pulley 4 Eject roller B 5 Eject pulley B 6 Upper duplex roller 7 Duplex pulley 8 Lower duplex roller 9 Lower change guide 10 Upper change guide 11 Eject full sensor EFS 12 Actuator eject full sensor 13 Switchback sensor SBS 14 Actuator switchback sensor ...

Page 504: ...2 1 22 Eject Feed shift section block diagram SBS EXIT_FEED_SENS YC4 9 YC4 16 YC4 15 EFS EXIT_PAP_SENS YC4 12 JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET FSSOL EM SB_CORE_A YC4 5 SB_CORE_B YC4 4 SB_CORE_A YC4 7 SB_CORE_B YC4 6 YC3 YC7 EPWB FRPWB ...

Page 505: ...ect feedshift section to the paper feed conveying section when duplex printing Figure 2 1 23 Duplex conveying section 1 4 6 7 5 3 8 9 2 5 4 4 1 Upper duplex roller 2 Middle duplex roller 3 Lower duplex roller 4 Duplex pulleys A 5 Duplex pulleys B 6 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 7 Actuator duplex sensor 1 8 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 9 Actuator duplex sensor 2 ...

Page 506: ... Duplex conveying section block diagram 35 ppm model DUS1 DU_ENTER_SENS YC11 2 DUS2 DU_SENS YC9 2 DUCL1 DU_CL1_REM YC11 9 DUCL2 RYPWB YC23 1 YC14 5 YC23 4 YC1 YC6 YC2 YC5 YC13 12 YC1 14 YC13 9 DU_CL2_REM YC7 2 YC14 12 YC1 7 FPWB1 EPWB ...

Page 507: ...S YC11 2 DUS2 DU_SENS YC9 2 DUM1 DU1_A YC16 2 DU1_B YC16 1 DU1_A YC16 4 DU1_B YC16 3 DUM2 DU2_A YC7 6 DU2_B YC7 5 DU2_A YC7 8 DU2_B YC7 7 RYPWB YC23 1 YC14 5 YC23 7 YC23 6 YC23 9 YC23 8 YC14 15 YC14 14 YC14 17 YC1 YC6 YC2 YC5 YC14 16 YC13 12 YC1 14 YC13 6 YC13 7 YC13 4 YC13 5 YC1 4 YC1 5 YC1 2 YC1 3 FPWB1 EPWB ...

Page 508: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 1 26 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 509: ...full wave rectification of AC power source input switching for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output Controls the fuser Heater 4 High voltage PWB HVPWB Generates main charging developer bias transfer bias and sepa ration bias 5 ISC PWB ISCPWB Controls the scanner section 6 CCD PWB CCDPWB Reads the image of originals 7 LED lamp PWB LLPWB Exposes originals 8 Operation PWB 1 OPWB1 Controls tou...

Page 510: ...ing relay circuit between feed PWB 1 and paper conveying unit 15 LSU relay PWB LSURPWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and laser scanner unit 16 APC PWB APCPWB Generates and controls the laser beam 17 PD PWB PDPWB Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam 18 Drum PWB DRPWB Drum individual information in EEPROM storage 19 Fuser heater PWB FHPWB Controls the fuser he...

Page 511: ...SP 9 Operation PWB 2 OPWB2 PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 10 Operation PWB 3 OPWB3 PARTS PWB OPERATION LED ASSY SP 11 Front PWB FRPWB PARTS PWB FRONT MONO ASSY SP 12 Feed PWB 1 FPWB1 PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP 13 Feed PWB 2 FPWB2 PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP 14 Relay PWB RPWB PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP 15 LSU relay PWB LSURPWB PARTS PWB LSU JUNC MONO ASSY SP 16 APC PWB APCPWB 17 PD PWB PDPWB 18 Drum PWB DR...

Page 512: ...Detects the paper gauge cassette 2 10 Paper gauge sensor 2 L PGS2 L Detects the paper gauge cassette 2 11 Paper length switch 1 PLSW1 Detects the length of paper cassette 1 12 Paper length switch 2 PLSW2 Detects the length of paper cassette 2 13 Paper width switch 1 PWSW1 Detects the width of paper cassette 1 14 Paper width switch 2 PWSW2 Detects the width of paper cassette 2 15 Feed sensor 1 FS1 ...

Page 513: ... quantity of toner in a toner hopper 34 Toner sensor TS Detects the toner density in the developer unit 35 Loop sensor LPS Detects a paper misfeed Controls the fuser motor by detecting deflection in the paper 36 ID sensor IDS Measures image density for calibration 37 Fuser thermistor 1 FTH1 Detects the heat roller temperature 38 Fuser thermistor 2 FTH2 Detects the heat roller temperature 39 Fuser ...

Page 514: ...le motor MM Drives the paper conveying section 9 Drum motor DRM Drives the drum unit 10 Developer motor DEVM Drives the developer unit 11 Toner motor TM Drives the toner container 12 Toner hopper motor THM Replenishes toner to the developer unit 13 Inner motor INM Drives the inner unit 14 Transfer motor TRM Drives the transfer section 15 Fuser motor FUM Drives the fuser section 16 Eject motor EM D...

Page 515: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 2 7 45 ppm model 55 ppm model only ...

Page 516: ...ols the fuser section front side 7 Fuser rear fan motor FURFM Cools the fuser section rear side 8 Eject front fan motor EFFM Cools the eject section front side 9 Eject rear fan motor ERFM Cools the eject section rear side 10 Eject fan motor 1 EFM1 Cools the eject section 11 Eject fan motor 2 EFM2 Cools the eject section 12 Heater fan motor HFM Cools the fuser heater PWB 13 Power source fan motor P...

Page 517: ...per conveying section 8 Registration clutch RCL 1 Controls the secondary paper feed 9 Duplex clutch 1 DUCL1 1 Controls the drive of duplex section 10 Duplex clutch 2 DUCL2 1 Controls the drive of duplex section 11 Pickup solenoid 1 PUSOL1 2 Operates the forwarding pulley cassette 1 12 Pickup solenoid 2 PUSOL2 2 Operates the forwarding pulley cassette 2 13 Cleaning solenoid CLSOL Controls the ID se...

Page 518: ... heat roller 19 Fuser thermostat 2 FTS2 Prevents overheating of the heat roller 20 Cassette heater CH Dehumidifies the cassette section option 21 Hard disk HDD Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode 1 35 ppm model only 2 45 ppm model 55 ppm model only ...

Page 519: ...LACK BLUE CODE FLS BK WH YC13 U112 U113 U45 YC10 U1 YS4 YS3 YC25 YC11 YC30 YC7 YC33 YC23 YC27 YC32 YC24 YC8 YC9 YC3 YC2 YC15 YC18 YC20 U25 YC5 YC12 YC21 YC17 YC16 YC14 BAT1 YS2 YS1 YC1 U6 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 7 1 7 40 72 1 80 1 1 1 5 13 50 1 72 8 1 3 2 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 200 1 1 5 200 10 12 9 1 1 15 6 8 7 6 ...

Page 520: ...trol signal 9 VSYNC_AN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 10 VSYNC_AP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 11 VSYNC_BN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 12 VSYNC_BP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 13 VSYNC_CN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 14 VSYNC_CP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 15 VSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 16 VSYNC_DP O 0 3 3 V DC ...

Page 521: ...gnal 40 SGND Ground YC5 1 TD1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data Connected to ethernet 2 TD1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 3 TD2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 4 TD2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 5 CT1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output 6 CT2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output 7 TD3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 8 TD3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 9 TD4 O 0 3 3 V DC...

Page 522: ...terface PWB 2 WAKEUP0 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 3 AUDIO0 I Analog Audio signal 4 GND Ground 5 USB_DP0 I O USB data signal 6 USB_DN0 I O USB data signal 7 VBUS0 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to IFPWB 8 GND Ground 9 RESET1 I 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal 10 WAKEUP1 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 11 AUDIO1 I Analog Audio signal 12 GND Ground 13 USB_DP1 I O USB data signal 14 USB_DN1 I O USB data signal 15 VBUS1...

Page 523: ... DRB5 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 DRB6 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 19 DRB7 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 20 GND Ground 21 DGB0 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 22 DGB1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 23 DGB2 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 24 DGB3 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 25 DGB4 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 26 DGB5 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse I...

Page 524: ...2 LA12 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 53 LA13 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 54 LA14 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 55 LA15 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 56 LA16 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 57 LA17 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 58 GND Ground 59 LD0 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 60 LD1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 61 LD2 I O 0 3 3 V DC p...

Page 525: ...ication data signal 7 SC_SO I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 8 SC_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Scanner clock signal YC12 1 DEEP_POWERO N O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal Connected to operation PWB 1 2 ENERGY_SAVE O 0 3 3 V DC Energy save signal 3 SUPND_POWER O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OPWB1 4 LED_MEMORY_N O 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 5 LED_ATTENTION _N O 0 3 3 V DC Attenti...

Page 526: ...ess bus signal 17 A3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 18 A2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 19 A1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 20 A0 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 21 D0 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 22 D1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 23 D2 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 24 WP O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 25 CD2 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 26 CD1 O 0 ...

Page 527: ...48 D9 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 49 D10 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 50 GND Ground YC17 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output Connected to operation PWB 1 2 DATA I O USB data signal 3 DATA I O USB data signal 4 NC Not used 5 GND Ground YC20 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output Connected to USB 2 DATA I O USB data signal 3 DATA I O USB data signal 4 GND Ground YC21 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 ...

Page 528: ... HTPDN I 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 3 LOCKN I 0 3 3 V DC Lock signal 4 GND Ground 5 RX0N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 6 RX0P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 7 GND Ground YC27 1 GND Ground Connected to hard disk 2 5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD 3 GND Ground YC30 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1 Connected to operation PWB 1 2 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1 3 5V O 5 V...

Page 529: ...C2 YC25 YC24 YC45 YC23 YC22 YC49 YC20 U100 U1 U13 U4 U8 YC46 YC50 YC8 YC9 YC7 YC19 YC18 YC16 YC15 YC6 YC1 YC27 YC4 YC5 YC11 YC48 YC17 A20 A1 B1 1 1 4 10 B20 A10 B10 A1 1 12 6 1 3 1 5 20 1 B19 B1 A1 1 40 1 40 1 18 1 11 1 20 A19 1 7 1 10 1 9 1 11 1 40 1 1 1 6 1 8 1 50 1 50 64 20 40 21 1 1 4 B1 ...

Page 530: ...3 V DC power to FRPWB 10 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to FRPWB YC4 1 GND Ground Connected to feed PWB 2 2 FEED_MOT_REM O 0 3 3 V DC PFM On Off 3 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFM clock signal 4 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC PFM ready signal 5 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC PFM drive switch signal 6 FEED_CL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL1 On Off 7 FEED_CL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL2 On Off 8 ASIST_CL2 O 0 24 V DC AS...

Page 531: ... Off 32 CAS1_LIFT_UP I 0 3 3 V DC LS1 On Off 33 GND Ground 34 CAS1_EMPTY I 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 35 PICK_SOL1_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off RET 36 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off ACT 37 CAS2_P0 I 0 3 3 V DC FS2 On Off 38 CAS2_LIFT_UP I 0 3 3 V DC LS2 On Off 39 CAS2_EMPTY I 0 3 3 V DC PS2 On Off 40 PICK_SOL2_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL2 On Off RET 41 PICK_SOL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL2 On Off ACT 42...

Page 532: ...RM_MOT_BK_R EM O 0 3 3 V DC DRM On Off 13 DRM_MOT_BK_CL K O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DRM clock signal 14 DRM_MOT_BK_R DY I 0 3 3 V DC DRM ready signal 15 DRM_MOT_BK_DI R O 0 3 3 V DC DRM drive switch signal 16 DRM_MOT_BK_B RK O 0 3 3 V DC DRM break signal 17 DLP_MOT_BK_RE M O 0 3 3 V DC DEVM On Off 18 DLP_MOT_BK_CL K O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DEVM clock signal 19 DLP_MOT_BK_RD Y I 0 3 3 V DC DEVM ready signal 20...

Page 533: ...0 3 3 V DC pulse RM clock signal 35 REG_MOT_REM C L O 0 3 3 V DC RM RCL On Off 36 GND Ground 37 CLN_SOL_RET O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off RET 38 CLN_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off ACT 39 REG_SENS_R_S Not used 40 REG_SENS_R_P Not used 41 REG_R_LED Not used 42 REG_SENS_F_S Not used 43 GND Ground 44 REG_SENS_F_P Not used 45 REG_F_LED Not used 46 M_TEMP Not used 47 POWER_OFF O 0 3 3 V DC Power off signal...

Page 534: ...3 V DC FUM On Off 16 FSR_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse FUM clock signal 17 FSR_MOT_RDY O 0 3 3 V DC FUM ready signal 18 GND Ground 19 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC FUM drive switch signal 20 FSR_MOT_BRK O 0 3 3 V DC FUM break signal 21 MPF_TABLE I 0 3 3 V DC MPTSW On Off 22 MPF_WID1 I 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 23 MPF_WID2 I 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 24 MPF_WID3 I 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 25 MPF_LNG I 0 3 3 ...

Page 535: ... Not used 46 PRESS_MOT_RE M1 Not used 47 PRESS_MOT_RE M2 Not used 48 PRESS_RLS_SEN S Not used 49 DU_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 50 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 51 GND Ground 52 REG_BK_SENS1_ S I Analog IDS detection signal 53 REG_BK_SENS1_ P I Analog IDS detection signal 54 REG_BK_LED O Analog IDS control signal 55 LOOP_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC LPS On Off 56 EDGE_FAN_L O 0 24 V DC EFM1 2 On Off 57 EDGE_FAN_H...

Page 536: ... 16 GND Ground 17 JUNC_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC FSSOL On Off ACT 18 JUNC_SOL_RET O 0 24 V DC FSSOL On Off RET YC8 1 WTNR_SET I Analog WTS2 detection signal Connected to front PWB 2 WTNR_FULL_VCO NT O 0 3 3 V DC WTS1 control signal 3 WTNR_FULL I Analog WTS1 detection signal 4 WTNR_NEAR_VC ONT O 0 3 3 V DC WTS2 control signal 5 WTNR_NEAR I Analog WTS2 detection signal 6 WTNR_LED O 0 3 3 V DC pulse WTS1 L...

Page 537: ...D Ground Connected to LSU relay PWB 2 DATA_2PBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 3 DATA_2NBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 4 GND Ground 5 DATA_1PBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 6 DATA_1NBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 7 GND Ground 8 GAIN_FIX_Bk O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB control signal 9 GND Ground 10 SDCLK_Bk O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB clock signal 1...

Page 538: ...3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 31 DATA_3N_Bk LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 32 GND Ground 33 EEPROM_CS_1_B k I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB EEPROM data signal 34 EEPROM_CS_2_B k I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB EEPROM data signal 35 GND Ground 36 SCLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 37 GND Ground 38 SDO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 39 GND Ground 40 SDI O 0 3 3 V DC p...

Page 539: ...ock signal Connected to high voltage PWB 2 DC_MAG_REM O 0 3 3 V DC DC main charger On Off 3 DC_MAG_CNT O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DC magnet bias control voltage 4 DC_SLV_CNT O PWM DC sleeve bias control voltage 5 AC_SLV_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC sleeve bias clock signal 6 AC_SLV_CNT O PWM AC sleeve bias control voltage 7 DISCHARGE I PWM Main charger control signal 8 AC_MAG_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse ACC magne...

Page 540: ...4 V DC TFM On Off A13 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM A14 TN_FAN2 Not used A15 24V1 Not used A16 LVU_FAN1 Not used A17 24V1 Not used A18 LVU_FAN2 Not used A19 24V1 Not used B1 SIDE_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFMPWB clock signal side B2 SIDE_SDO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFMPWB serial communication data signal side B3 SIDE_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC PFMPWB select signal side B4 SIDE_SDI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFMPWB se...

Page 541: ...AL_DIR Not used 11 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRSOL 12 EXIT_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC BRSOL On Off ACT 13 EXIT_SOL_RET O 0 24 V DC BRSOL On Off RET 14 GND Ground 15 EXIT_COV_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC BRECSW On Off 16 GND Ground 17 EXIT_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC BRES On Off 18 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRES 19 N C Not used 20 BRIDGE2 REM O 0 3 3 V DC BRCM2 On Off 21 BRIDGE2 PH O 0 3 3 V DC BRCM2 control signal 22...

Page 542: ...4 V DC power to PSFM YC23 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender Connected to coin vender 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 COIN_EN I 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender enable signal 5 FGND Ground 6 FEED_COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 7 EJECT_COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 8 COPYING_SIG O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 9 TXD_COIN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication dat...

Page 543: ...rol signal B4 KEY4 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B5 KEY3 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B6 KEY2 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B7 KEY1 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B8 KEY0 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B9 GND Ground B10 COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Key card count signal YC26 A1 EDGE_FAN_ALM Not used Connected to fuser unit A2 EDGE_FAN Not used A3 24V1 Not used A4 EDGE_FAN_A...

Page 544: ..._TH I Analog FTH2 detection signal B12 GND Not used B13 GUIDE_TH1 Not used B14 GND Ground B15 GUIDE_TH2 I Analog FTH1 detection signal B16 MAIN_TH2 Not used B17 MAIN_TH1 Not used B18 GND Not used B19 24V1 Not used B20 BRIDGE_FAN Not used YC27 1 GND Ground Connected to RFID PWB and toner motor 2 EEP_SDA2 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 3 EEP_SCL2 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 4 3 3...

Page 545: ...DC pulse Image control signal 14 VSYNC_CP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 15 VSYNC_DN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 16 VSYNC_DP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 17 SGND Ground 18 TCLKP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 19 TCLKN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 20 SGND Ground 21 TCP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 22 TCN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 23 SGND ...

Page 546: ...signal Connected to main PWB 37 EG SDIR I 0 3 3 V DC Engine communication direction sig nal 38 EG_SI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 39 EG_SCLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Engine lock signal 40 SGND Ground Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 547: ...J 2LH 2 3 29 2 3 3 Power source PWB Figure 2 3 3 Power source PWB silk screen diagram YC3 YC1 YC12 YC11 YC9 YC13 YC10 YC7 YC8 YC6 YC14 YC4 YC5 TB1 TB2 TB3 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 1 1 1 3 1 6 4 6 8 8 3 4 1 2 1 1 6 4 3 ...

Page 548: ... 2 NC Not used 3 IH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to FHPWB YC5 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH Connected to cassette heater 2 DH_LIVE Not used 3 NC Not used 4 NC Not used 5 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH 6 DH_NEUTRAL Not used YC6 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to PFCH Connected to paper feeder large capac ity feede...

Page 549: ...er 6 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB 7 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB 8 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB 9 GND Ground 10 GND Ground 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 GND Ground 14 GND Ground 15 GND Ground 16 GND Ground YC13 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 2 24V1 Not used 3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 4 PGND Ground 5 PGND Not use...

Page 550: ... power to MPWB Connected to main PWB 2 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 3 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 4 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 551: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 3 33 2 3 4 ISC PWB Figure 2 3 4 ISC PWB silk screen diagram YC5 YC14 YC2 YC1 YC13 YC9 YC6 YC11 YC7 YC12 YC8 YC3 YC4 4 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 1 40 1 11 1 6 1 1 3 1 8 7 1 1 16 6 3 5 ...

Page 552: ... DC pulse Transmission data signal 7 GND Ground YC5 1 SMOT AP O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal Connected to scanner motor 2 SMOT BP O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal 3 SMOT AN O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal 4 SMOT BN O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal YC6 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LLPWB Connected to LED lamp PWB 2 FAIL I 0 3 3 V DC Error signal 3 SDA I O 0 3 ...

Page 553: ... Serial communication data signal 15 AFECLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 16 GND Ground 17 DIS_CIS_1P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 DIS_CIS_1N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 19 GND Ground 20 DIS_CIS_2P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 21 DIS_CIS_2N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 22 GND Ground 23 DIS_CIS_3P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 24 DIS_CIS_3N I 0 3 3 V DC ...

Page 554: ..._TMG I 0 3 3 V DC DPTS On Off 3 DP_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC ready signal 4 DP_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC Select signal 5 DP_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 6 DP_SO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 7 DP_SI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 8 DP_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC DPOCSW On Off 9 Reserve Not used 10 GND Ground 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 Reserve Not used 14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24...

Page 555: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 3 37 YC14 1 3 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to ODSW Connected to original detection switch 2 GND Ground 3 CO_SW I 0 3 3 V DC ODSW On Off Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 556: ...2LH 2 3 38 2 3 5 Operation PWB 1 Figure 2 3 5 Operation PWB 1 silk screen diagram YC1 YC9 YC6 YC8 YC12 YC5 YC10 SW1 YC13 YC14 YC11 YC3 YC2 YC15 YC4 1 1 1 1 1 4 12 1 1 4 1 1 2 9 5 1 4 20 12 1 5 1 12 1 40 1 15 6 ...

Page 557: ...US O 0 3 3 V DC Operation panel status signal 3 INT_POWERKEY _N O 0 3 3 V DC Power key On Off 4 PANEL RESET I 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal 5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal 6 LIGHTOFF_POW ERON I 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal 7 SHUT_DOWN I 0 3 3 V DC 24 V down signal 8 LED_PROCESSI NG_N I 0 3 3 V DC Processing LED control signal 9 LED_ATTENTION _N I 0 3 3 V DC Attention LED control signal 10 LED_MEM...

Page 558: ...3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 18 SGND Ground 19 G3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 20 G4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 21 G5 MSB O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 22 SGND Ground 23 B0 LSB O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 24 B1 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 25 B2 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 26 SGND Ground 27 B3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 28 B4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 29 B5 MSB O 0 3...

Page 559: ...I 0 3 3 V DC Power key On Off 4 SCAN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Scan signal 1 5 LED1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 6 SUPND_POWER O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OPWB2 7 KEY3 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 3 8 KEY2 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 2 9 KEY1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 1 10 LED0...

Page 560: ... Operation panel LED display drive signal 2 10 LED3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 3 11 LED4 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 4 12 GND Ground YC8 1 PROCESSING_L ED O 0 3 3 V DC Processing LED control signal Connected to operation PWB 3 2 MEMORY LED O 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 3 ATTENTION_LED O 0 3 3 V DC Attention LED control signa...

Page 561: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 3 43 2 3 6 Front PWB Figure 2 3 6 Front PWB silk screen diagram YC4 YC11 YC10 YC9 YC2 YC7 YC6 YC3 YC12 YC8 YC5 YC1 1 4 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 11 10 1 19 11 1 1 1 12 18 10 1 4 18 16 ...

Page 562: ...OM data signal 5 EEP_SCL1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 6 GND Ground 7 TN_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 8 TPD_Bk_1 O Analog DEVPWB detection signal 9 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 I 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB control signal 10 TPD_TEMP_Bk O Analog Developer thermistor detection sig nal 11 LSU_FAN I 0 24 V DC LSUFM On Off 12 FRONT_OPEN O 0 3 3 V DC FRCSW On Off 13 I2C_SCL I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data si...

Page 563: ...I 0 24 V DC DEVFM On Off 16 DLP_FAN_L I 0 24 V DC DEVFM On Off 17 ROT_HP_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DEVSS On Off 18 INTER_LOCK Not used 19 NC Not used YC4 1 GND Ground Connected to eject unit 2 ROT_HP_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC DEVSS On Off 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DEVSS 4 SB_CORE B O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 5 SB_CORE A O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 6 SB_CORE B O 0 24 V DC pulse EM ...

Page 564: ... DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 3 EEP_SDA1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 4 GND Ground 5 DRM_ADR0_Bk Not used 6 DRM_ADR1_Bk Not used 7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL 8 ERS_Bk_REM O 0 24 V DC CL On Off 24V Not used ERS_REM_PRE Not used 8 NC Not used YC7 1 TPD_TEMP_BK I Analog Developer thermistor detection sig nal Connected to developer unit 2 DLP_VCONT_BK_ 1 O 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB control s...

Page 565: ... Not used 11 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OTEM 12 I2C_SDA I 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 13 GND Ground 14 I2C_SCL O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 15 FRONT_OPEN O 0 3 3 V DC FRCSW On Off 16 GND Ground 17 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM 18 LSU_FAN O 0V 24 V DC LSUFM On Off YC9 1 ROT_MOT_REM Not used Connected to engine PWB 2 ROT_MOT_CLK Not used 3 ROT_MOT_DIR Not used 4 ROT_...

Page 566: ...C 24 V DC power to FUFFM 4 CONTAINER_FAN O 0 24 V DC FUFFM On Off YC12 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LEDPWB1 Connected to LED PWB 1 2 2 LED O 0 5 V DC LED On Off 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LEDPWB2 4 LED O 0 5 V DC LED On Off YC13 1 INNER_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC INM On Off Connected to inner motor 2 INNER_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC INM On Off Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 567: ...2 3 7 Feed PWB 1 silk screen diagram YC20 YC3 YC27 YC19 YC18 YC17 YC14 YC10 YC16 YC13 YC12 YC4 YC4 YC4 YC26 YC23 YC22 YC25 YC9 YC15 YC8 YC11 YC5 11 1 1 7 1 20 1 1 1 10 1 6 1 1 1 50 1 64 8 1 2 15 18 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 7 3 8 4 1 2 12 9 4 ...

Page 568: ...ion signal 10 GND Ground 11 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 12 DU_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 13 PRESS_RLS_SEN S Not used 14 PRESS_MOT_RE M2 Not used 15 PRESS_MOT_RE M1 Not used 16 DU_FAN Not used 17 DU_OPEN O 0 3 3 V DC DUCSW On Off 18 DU2_REM_CL_LO W I 0 3 3 V DC DUM2 DUCL2 On Off 19 DU2_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse DUM2 clock signal 20 DU2_PD I 0 3 3 V DC DUM2 control signal 21 INTER_LOCK Not used 22 TC_TON...

Page 569: ...h signal 43 GND Ground 44 FSR_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC FUM ready signal 45 FSR_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse FUM clock signal 46 FSR_MOT_REM I 0 3 3 V DC FUM On Off 47 FSR_CL Not used 48 MAIN_HEAT I 0 3 3 V DC FH1 On Off 49 SUB_HEAT I 0 3 3 V DC FH2 On Off 50 ZEROC I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Zero cross signal 51 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ H I 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off 52 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ L I 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off 53 GND Ground 54...

Page 570: ... CLN_SOL_RET I 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off RET 15 GND Ground 16 REG_MOT_REM C L I 0 3 3 V DC RM RCL On Off 17 REG_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse RM clock signal 18 REG_MOT_PD I 0 3 3 V DC RM control signal 19 IH_PWB_FAN_AL M O 0 3 3 V DC HFM alarm signal 20 IH_PWB_FAN_H I 0 24 V DC HFM On Off 21 IH_PWB_FAN_L I 0 24 V DC HFM On Off 22 DLP_MOT_CLR_DI R Not used 23 DLP_MOT_CLR_R DY Not used 24 DLP_MOT_CLR_C L...

Page 571: ...I 0 3 3 V DC DRM On Off 40 GND Ground 41 TRANS_MOT_BRK I 0 3 3 V DC TCM break signal 42 TRANS_MOT_DIR I 0 3 3 V DC TCM drive switch signal 43 TRANS_MOT_RDY O 0 3 3 V DC TCM ready signal 44 TRANS_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse TCM clock signal 45 TRANS_MOT_RE M I 0 3 3 V DC TCM On Off 46 TCON_SET Not used 47 DU_ENTER_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS1 On Off 48 EXIT_FAN I 0 24 V DC EFM On Off 49 DU_MOT_REM I 0 3 3...

Page 572: ...er motor 2 DLP_MOT_Bk_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC DEVM drive switch signal 3 DLP_MOT_Bk_RD Y I 0 3 3 V DC DEVM ready signal 4 DLP_MOT_Bk_CL K O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DEVM clock signal 5 DLP_MOT_Bk_RE M O 0 24 V DC DEVM On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM YC9 1 NC Not used Connected to drum motor 2 DRM_MOT_Bk_BR K O 0 3 3 V DC DRM break signal 3 DRM_MOT_Bk_DI R O 0 3 3 V DC DRM drive switch ...

Page 573: ... Connected to relay PWB 2 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC TRM drive switch signal 3 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC TRM ready signal 4 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TRM clock signal 5 TRANS_MOT_RE M O 0 24 V DC TRM On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRM 8 GND Not used 9 24V2 Not used 10 TANK_SET Not used YC14 1 REG_BK_LED O Analog IDS control signal Connected to relay PWB 2 REG_BK_SENS...

Page 574: ... from PCUSW YC16 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB Connected to high voltage PWB 2 GND Ground YC17 1 GND Ground Connected to relay PWB 2 GND Ground 3 CL_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off 4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to CLSOL 5 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 6 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to RYPWB 8 MPF_CL_REM O 0 24 V DC MPPFCL On Off 9 MPF_J...

Page 575: ...7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUM YC19 1 EXIT_REAR_FAN O 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off Connected to eject rear fan motor 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ERFM YC20 1 JOB_SET I 0 3 3 V DC Job separator set signal Connected to job separator 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 JOB_MOT_REM O 0 24 V DC JSEM On Off 5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSMPWB 6 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse JSEM clock signal 7 5V O 5...

Page 576: ...P_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC LPS On Off YC25 1 REG_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal Connected to registration motor 2 REG_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal 3 REG_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal 4 REG_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal YC26 1 3 3V2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to EPWB Connected to engine PWB 2 3 3V3 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to EPWB 3 G...

Page 577: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 3 59 2 3 8 Feed PWB 2 Figure 2 3 8 Feed PWB 2 silk screen diagram YC6 YC8 YC7 YC4 YC3 YC13 YC12 YC10 YC1 YC11 YC2 YC5 3 5 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 14 28 15 4 1 1 1 1 7 6 50 2 12 24 13 1 ...

Page 578: ...LNG2 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW2 On Off 15 CAS2_LNG1 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW2 On Off 16 CAS1_WID O 0 3 3 V DC PWSW1 On Off 17 CAS1_LNG3 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 18 CAS1_LNG2 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 19 CAS1_LNG1 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 20 GND Ground 21 CAS2_QUANT2 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 L On Off 22 CAS2_QUANT1 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 U On Off 23 CAS1_QUANT2 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS1 L On Off 24 CAS1_QUANT1 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS1 U ...

Page 579: ...SIST_CL1 I 0 24 V DC ASCL1 On Off YC2 1 FEED_MOT_GAI N Not used Connected to paper feed motor 2 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC PFM drive switch signal 3 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC PFM ready signal 4 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFM clock signal 5 FEED_MOT_REM O 0 24 V DC PFM On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFM YC3 1 CAS1_LNG1 I 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off Connected to paper length s...

Page 580: ...4 GND Ground 25 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 U On Off 26 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2 L 27 GND Ground 28 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 L On Off YC4 1 FEED_CL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL1 On Off Connected to paper feed clutch 1 2 2 24V2 O 24 V DC PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1 3 FEED_CL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL2 On Off 4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFCL2 YC5 1 NC Not used Connected to paper con ve...

Page 581: ...Off 15 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCL YC8 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PUSOL1 Connected to primary paper feed unit 2 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off ACT 3 PICK_SOL1_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off RET 4 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS1 5 GND Ground 6 CAS1_EMPTY_S ENS I 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 7 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS1 8 GND Ground 9 CAS1_LIFT_UP_ SENS I 0 3 3 V DC LS1 ...

Page 582: ... V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL1 YC11 1 GND Ground Connected to feed PWB 1 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB1 5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1 6 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1 YC12 1 ASIST_CL2 O 0 24 V DC ASCL2 On Off Connected to assist clutch 2 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL2 YC13 1 CURRENT_SIG I 0 3 3 V DC Current signal Connected to current PWB 2 GN...

Page 583: ...2LH 2 3 65 2 3 9 Relay PWB Figure 2 3 9 Relay PWB silk screen diagram YC6 YC16 YC11 YC5 YC2 YC15 YC12 YC3 YC4 YC1 YC7 YC8 YC14 YC9 YC13 YC10 1 10 1 1 1 16 1 1 8 1 4 1 6 1 3 1 12 1 11 1 18 2 1 1 20 2 9 7 1 9 1 8 ...

Page 584: ...C power from FPWB1 10 PRESS_RLS_REM 2 Not used 11 PRESS_RLS_REM 1 Not used 12 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1 13 PRESS_RLS_SEN S Not used 14 DU_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 15 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 16 REG_BK_SENS1_ S O Analog IDS detection signal 17 REG_BK_SENS1_ P O Analog IDS detection signal 18 REG_BK_LED I Analog IDS control signal YC2 1 GND Ground Connected to MP tray unit 2 MPF_LNG I 0...

Page 585: ...CL On Off 14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MPPFCL 15 MPF_LIFT_DR_A O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 16 MPF_LIFT_DR_B O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off YC4 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CLSOL Connected to cleaning solenoid 2 ID_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off YC5 1 TANK_SET Not used Connected to feed PWB 1 2 24V2 Not used 3 GND Not used 4 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 5 GND Ground 6 TRANS_MOT_RE M I ...

Page 586: ...5 DU2_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 drive control signal 6 DU2_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 drive control signal 7 DU2_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 drive control signal 8 DU2_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 drive control signal YC9 1 GND Ground Connected to duplex sen sor 2 2 DU_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DUS2 YC10 1 LOOP_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC LPS On Off Connected to loop sensor ant ID se...

Page 587: ... On Off 4 MPF_WID1 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 5 MPF_WID2 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 6 MPF_WID3 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 7 MPF_LNG O 0 3 3 V DC MPPLSW On Off 8 LED_3 3V3 I 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power from FPWB1 9 MPF_PPR_SET O 0 3 3 V DC MPPS On Off 10 MPF_LIFT_UP_SE NS O 0 3 3 V DC MPLS1 On Off 11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN _SENS O 0 3 3 V DC MPLS2 On Off 12 MPF_JAM_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC MPFS On Off 13 MPF_CL_REM I ...

Page 588: ...8 GND Ground 9 DU_CL_UPPER_R EM I 0 24 V DC DUCL1 On Off 10 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 11 EXIT_FAN I 0 24 V DC EFM On Off 12 DU_ENTER_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS1 On Off YC16 1 DU1_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal Connected to duplex motor 1 2 DU1_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 3 DU1_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 4 DU1_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 dri...

Page 589: ...2LL 2LJ 2LH 2 3 71 2 3 10 LSU relay PWB Figure 2 3 10 LSU relay PWB silk screen diagram YC1 YC4 YC3 YC2 1 40 1 1 1 10 30 6 ...

Page 590: ... 3 V DC pulse APCPWB EEPROM data signal 9 GND Ground 10 DATA_3N_Bk LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 11 DATA_3P_Bk LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 12 GND Ground 13 DATA_4N_Bk LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 14 DATA_4P_Bk LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 15 GND Ground 16 BD_Bk O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal synchronization signal 17 LSU_TH_Bk O Analog...

Page 591: ...e Horizontal synchronization signal 3 LSU_TH Bk I Analog LSU thermistor detection signal 4 PALA_SIG P3_2Bk Not used 5 LDD_CS 2 Bk Not used 6 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB 8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB 9 LDD_CS 1 Bk O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB control signal 10 SDI1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 11 SDO1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communi...

Page 592: ... 24 GAIN FIX Bk O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB control signal 25 DATA_1NBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 26 DATA_1PBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 27 GND Ground 28 DATA_2NBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal N 29 DATA_2PBk LVDS O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal P 30 GND Ground Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 593: ...02K906370 2K906370 35 ppm model PULLEY PICKUP ASSY 302HN06080 2HN06080 Left registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGIST L SP 302K994450 2K994450 Regist cleaner L PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP 302LF94160 2LF94160 Right registration roller ROLLER REGIST R 302LF24150 2LF24150 Regist cleaner R UNDER CLEANER REGIST 2BL07950 Middle roller PARTS ROLLER MIDDLE L SP 302LC94550 2LC94550 Paper conveying roller PA...

Page 594: ... ROLLER DU LOW SP 302LK94060 2LK94060 Middle duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU MID SP 302K994480 2K994480 Upper duplex roller 45 55 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP 302K994490 2K994490 35 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP 302LK94070 2LK94070 Eject roller B PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP 302LC94350 2LC94350 Eject roller PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP 302LH94290 2LH94290 Drum filter FILTER FAN INNER ASSY ZG 302LF94310 2LF9431...

Page 595: ... 072LH7U1 Drum unit DK 6305 Developer unit DV 6305 Fuser unit FK 6306 Transfer belt unit PARTS BELT ASSY SP Eject filter FILTER TOP Toner Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE 220 240 V specifications MK 6305A Maintenance kit 600 000 pages MK 6305A MAINTENANCE KIT 1702LH8KL0 072LH8KL Drum unit DK 6305 Developer unit DV 6305 Fuser unit FK 6307 Transfer belt unit PARTS BELT ASSY SP Eject filter FILTER TOP To...

Page 596: ... U901 and check feeding count Target to replace at 150K P 1 5 7 Left registration roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Regist cleaner L Clean Clean Vacuum P 1 5 38 Right registration roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Regist cleaner R Clean Clean Vacuum P 1 5 38 Middle roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Paper conveying roller Clean Clean Clean wi...

Page 597: ...mage line arises Mirror B Clean Clean airblow after dry cloth only when unusual image line arises 2pcs ISU lens Clean Clean airblow after dry cloth only when unusual image line arises LED mount Check Replace Replace if there are image prob lems RAIL ISU R F Lubricat ion Apply grease if abnormal sound and jitter image appears Optical rail grease PG 671 P N 60170000 Original size sensor Check Clean ...

Page 598: ...00K 1200K Points and cautions Page Fuser sec tion Fuser unit Replace Every 600k Replace MK KIT P 1 5 39 Section Maintenance part location User call 600K 1200K Points and cautions Page Eject Duple x section Lower duplex roller Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Middle duplex roller Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Upper duplex roller Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Eject roller ...

Page 599: ... Clean Clean Vacuum P 1 5 74 LSU filter Clean Vacuum P 1 5 75 Toner filter Left filter Replace Replace Every 600k Replace MK KIT 2pcs P 1 5 72 P 1 5 73 Eject filter Replace Replace Every 600k Replace MK KIT 2pcs P 1 5 71 Each Clutches Check Replace Check Check the image registration and paper feed conveying condition on paper feed conveying regis tration part Sensors Check Check Clean with alcohol...

Page 600: ... defect 38 mm 1 1 2 39 mm 1 9 16 109 9 mm 4 5 16 57 mm 2 1 4 63 mm 2 1 2 Carger roller Magnet roller Press roller Heat roller 164 mm 6 7 16 Transfer belt Sleeve roller Right registration roller Left registration roller 44 mm 1 3 4 Transfer roller 125 7 mm 4 15 16 Drum ...

Page 601: ...ging emulation mode to PCL6 R FRPO P1 6 EXIT FRPO parameters Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Top margin A1 Integer value in inches 0 A2 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 0 Left margin A3 Integer value in inches 0 A4 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 0 Page length A5 Integer value in inches 17 A6 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 30 Page width A7 Integer value in inches 17 A8 Fraction value in 1 10...

Page 602: ...rn 2 Carriage return linefeed 1 Linefeed action P3 0 Ignores 1 Linefeed 2 Linefeed carriage return 1 Automatic emulation switching P4 0 AES disabled 1 AES enabled 120V 1 220 240V 0 Alternative emulation P5 Same as the P1 values except that 9 is ignored 6 Automatic emulation switching trigger P7 0 Page eject commands 1 None 2 Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands 3 Prescribe EXIT commands 4 Formfe...

Page 603: ...4 A6 10 5 14 8 cm 15 JIS B6 12 8 18 2 cm 16 Commercial 9 3 7 8 8 7 8 inches 17 Commercial 6 3 5 8 6 1 2 inches 18 ISO B5 17 6 25 cm 19 Custom 11 7 17 7 inches 20 B4toA4 21 A3toA4 22 A4toA4 98 23 STKtoA4 24 STKtoB4 30 C4 22 9 32 4 cm 31 Hagaki 10 14 8 cm 32 Ofuku hagaki 14 8 20 cm 33 Officio II 38 12 18 39 8K 40 16K 42 8 5 13 5 inches 50 Statement 51 Folio 52 Youkei 2 53 Youkei 4 0 Default cassette...

Page 604: ... 14 Norway 15 Denmark 2 16 Spain 2 17 Latin America 50 99 HP PCL symbol set coding 41 Code set at power up in daisywheel emulation U7 0 Same as the default emulation mode P1 1 IBM 6 PCL 53 Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable font U8 Default font pitch integer value 10 U9 Default font pitch decimal value 0 Font height for the default scal able font V0 Integer value in 100 points 0 to 9 0 V1 Integer ...

Page 605: ...nvelope 13 Cardstock 14 Coated 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 1 Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2 X1 X2 1 Plain 3 Preprinted 5 Bond 6 Recycled 7 Vellum 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 1 Paper type for optional cas settes 3 to 7 X3 X4 X5 1 Plain 3 Preprinted 5 Bond 6 Recycled 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 17 High quality 21 to ...

Page 606: ...is the same size as the image 2 Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 3 Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 8 Through the image Loads paper from the current paper cassette 9 Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 10 Enlarges or reduces the image to ...

Page 607: ...ng the leading edge registra tion of the cassette printing adjustment Registration motor turning on timing secondary paper feed start timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P 1 3 34 6 Adjusting the leading edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination start timing U402 Lead U402 test pattern P 1 3 133 7 Adjusting the trailing edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination end timing U402 T...

Page 608: ...ct Rotate U072 For copying originals from the DP To make an adjustment for duplex copying select Back 12 Adjusting the leading edge registra tion scanning adjustment Original scan start timing U066 U071 Front Rotate Front Head Back Head Test chart P 1 3 49 P 1 3 54 U066 For copying an original placed on the platen To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra tion select Rotate U071 For copying...

Page 609: ...B5 A5 A11 A8 A3 24V1 DF_RDY DF_DET 5V EXIT_SENS 18 17 18 17 GND 6 3 4 5 5 1 DF_SDO 2 2 DF_CLK 1 DF_SEL 3 DF_SDI 7 4 7 A12 PF_RDY PF_SEL Relay 1 2 2 1 GND N C 16 19 EXIT_SOL_REM 24V1 DECAL_PH GND EXIT_COV_OPEN EXIT_SOL_RET GND 5V BRIDGE1 CLK GND BRIDGE1 PD BRIDGE_SENS 1 BRIDGE_OPEN 15 10 13 9 14 12 13 12 11 3 14 3 6 15 1 18 17 17 16 8 BRIDGE2 DIR 5 13 12 BRIDGE_SENS 2 BRIDGE1 DIR BRIDGE1 PH BRIDGE1...

Page 610: ...BD_Bk LSU_TH_Bk PALA_SIG P3_2Bk GND LDD_CS 2 Bk INT_ST 2 Bk LDD_CS 1 Bk MSET_N CUALM_Bk INT_ST 1 Bk PALA_SIG P0 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk GND PALA_SIG P4 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk SDCLK_Bk GND GAIN FIX Bk DATA_1N_Bk LVDS DATA_1P_Bk LVDS GND GND DATA_2N_Bk LVDS DATA_2P_Bk LVDS GND SDI GND SDO SCK GND GND EEPROM CS 2 Bk EEPROM CS 1 Bk GND DATA_4P_Bk LVDS DATA_3P_Bk LVDS DATA_4N_Bk LVDS DATA_3N_Bk LVD...

Page 611: ... 7 6 9 15 14 17 16 19 13 2 5 4 3 12 10 11 20 1 18 8 7 6 9 15 14 17 16 19 13 2 5 4 3 12 10 11 1 18 8 7 6 9 15 14 17 16 13 2 5 4 3 12 10 11 1 18 8 7 6 9 15 14 17 16 13 2 5 4 3 12 10 11 1 8 7 6 9 2 5 4 3 10 11 1 8 7 6 9 2 5 4 3 10 1 2 3 9 9 10 20 17 17 2 3 4 1 12 13 15 16 11 14 11 12 13 16 14 10 19 18 19 20 15 18 8 8 6 7 4 5 5 6 7 1 2 3 9 9 10 17 17 2 3 4 1 12 13 15 16 11 14 11 12 13 16 14 10 19 18 1...

Page 612: ...3 A8 B8 5 8 6 B14 B13 B15 7 B16 A7 A6 A1 B18 B20 A3 B19 3 1 GND Vout 5V A5 A9 2 3 5V A8 FSR_FAN_ALM A10 A11 A14 A13 FSR_RLS_SENS 24V1 5V GND FSR_SIZE_SENS FSR_BLT_PLS GND A20 GND BRIDGE_FAN 24V1 EDGE_FAN 24V1 B20 EDGE_FAN_ALM A5 A1 EDGE_FAN_ALM A18 A17 A16 PRESS_TH GUIDE_TH1 GND FSR_RLS_DR_CW GND GND GND GND MAIN_TH1 MAIN_TH2 5V FSR_RLS_DR_CCW EDGE_TH EDGE_FAN PRESS_HEART_REM ROTATION IH_RXD B4 1 ...

Page 613: ... EXIT_FAN DU1_MOT_REM CL_H 13 14 15 3 11 8 7 4 6 DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 24V1 1 DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK 17 11 7 5 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 50 1 15 14 5 4 3 3 4 2 2 11 41 49 38 39 40 54 56 57 58 57 2 4 1 5 6 FSR_CL_REM GND 24V2 2 1 NC 1 24V1 4 REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_R_S REG_SENS_R_P DLP_MOT_BK_CLK 26 M_TEMP 9 12 5 TRA...

Page 614: ...D DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN DU1_MOT_REM CL_H 13 14 15 3 11 8 7 4 6 DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 24V1 1 DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK 17 11 7 5 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 50 1 15 14 5 4 3 3 4 2 2 11 41 49 38 39 40 54 56 57 58 57 2 4 1 5 6 FSR_CL_REM GND 24V2 2 1 NC 1 24V1 4 REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_R_S REG_SENS_R_P DLP_MOT_BK_CLK 26 M_...

Page 615: ...7 7 6 11 8 9 9 7 7 5 3 11 13 12 5 11 6 12 13 1 2 2 3 3 2 10 11 13 11 9 12 10 9 6 5 13 12 3 18 19 14 15 2 B23 1 D44 B28 B25 B27 B26 8 18 5 B22 B30 D43 4 3 B29 2 7 6 9 12 PRESS_RLSMOT2 REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED REG_BK_SENS1_S DU_SENS 6 1 2 1 2 5 7 BELT_JAM_SENS 7 MPF_WID1 7 8 PRESS_RLSMOT21 11 5V 10 7 7 8 9 5 6 8 9 9 4 8 3 9 8 MPF_TABLE 15 WID3 5V 9 1 2 1 3 15 GND 17 16 18 18 24V2 6 GND 4 TRANS_MOT_...

Page 616: ... 2 1 24V2 1 24V2 1 3 3V GND Vout Vout GND 2 1 1 2 8 7 7 6 11 8 9 9 7 7 5 3 11 13 12 5 11 6 12 13 1 2 2 3 3 2 10 11 13 11 9 12 10 9 6 5 13 12 3 18 19 14 15 2 B23 1 D44 B28 B25 B27 B26 8 18 5 B22 B30 D43 4 3 B29 2 7 6 9 12 PRESS_RLSMOT2 REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED REG_BK_SENS1_S DU_SENS 6 1 2 1 2 5 7 BELT_JAM_SENS 7 MPF_WID1 7 8 PRESS_RLSMOT21 11 5V 10 7 7 8 9 5 6 8 9 9 4 8 3 9 8 MPF_TABLE 15 WID3 5V ...

Page 617: ... 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 1 18 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 3 1 5V 1 Vout 3 2 2 15 1 LIFT_MOT2_DR 7 7 6 2 3 1 3 5V 24V2 2 V FEED_CL_REM 24V2 3 2 6 5 4 MID_CL_REM 8 4 FEED_CL2_REM 8 7 4 5 GND 1 GND 7 9 11 10 GND 8 2 GND 5V Vout 2 1 6 3 3 2 2 3 4 5V 1 2 3 BEND_SENS GND 6 MID_B MID_B MID_A MID_A 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 5 24V2 7 2 4 3 2 24V2 3 2 1 1 2 2 9 3 Vout GND 3 GND Vout ...

Page 618: ...2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 1 18 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 3 1 5V 1 Vout 3 2 2 15 1 LIFT_MOT2_DR 7 7 6 2 3 1 3 5V 24V2 2 V FEED_CL_REM 24V2 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 MID_CL_REM 8 2 FEED_CL2_REM 8 7 4 3 GND 1 GND 7 9 11 10 GND 8 2 GND 5V Vout 10 2 1 8 3 3 2 2 3 4 5V 1 2 3 BEND_SENS GND 6 MID_B MID_B MID_A MID_A 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 5 24V2 7 2 4 3 2 24V2 3 2 1 1 2 2 9 3 1 COM ...

Page 619: ...MAIN_IDC AC_MAIN_CNT AC_MAIN_CLK 10 8 6 3 1 PB_OUTPUT 4 24V2 GND 1 2 2 1 FB_OUTPUT 1 2 2 1 2 NC 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 DRM_HEAT_REM 2 3 3 GND 2 1 1 3 1 GND 24V2 1 2 24V1 5 GND 8 8 7 6 3 DH_NEUTRAL DH_NEUTRAL 3 2 7 8 9 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 4 3 2 1 5 6 10 7 8 9 4 3 2 1 5 6 10 7 8 9 4 3 2 1 5 6 5 6 24V1 24V1 4 2 DH_LIVE 1 6 1 1 LIVE 1 1 NEUTRAL 2 DH_LIVE_OUT 1 1 NC 2 NC 1 4 DH_LIVE_IN 2 3 3 1 DH_LIVE 1 1 2 1 MSW...

Page 620: ... 29 30 30 31 DGB6 DGB5 SH 10 10 DGB2 34 TG 33 GND 25 DGB4 RS 23 24 34 GND Mono Color 9 7 GND GND CCDCLK1 5 1V 6 39 40 6 4 40 5 1 4 2 1 3 3 2 2 4 10V 1 DBB7 37 DBB5 35 36 HHALF TWS_DET 40 SLEEP 39 38 GND 41 42 LA2 42 41 LA3 43 44 LA4 44 43 45 LA5 45 46 LA6 46 LA7 47 47 LA8 48 LA9 49 49 48 LD4 LD3 LD5 50 GND 58 LD1 LD2 63 LA12 63 64 4 LA11 SMOT AP 6 5 4 11 11 3 3V GND 10 9 POW 9 10 7 7 50 1 LD0 55 5...

Page 621: ...DCD 5V 2 15 15 3 SGND SGND N C 8 5 4 SGND PHS DCD SGND 8 5V OUT PHS RTS 18 18 5V 7 8 KMACK KMRXD KMRXD 5 4 4 1 2 3 12 7 8 11 6 5 10 9 4 1 2 3 12 7 8 11 6 5 10 9 4 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 SC 6 6 7 7 KMACK 21 12 7 DTR PHS DTR 16 16 TXD SGND 4 4 13 13 SGND FG 1 PHS TXD 3 3 11 1 2 3 12 7 8 11 6 9 10 5 4 1 GND 12V 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 SGND 1 1 10 KMDREQ SGND 9 RXD 14 12 KMDET NC FG SGND CK 2 2 3 3 SGND 5 5 6 6 ...

Page 622: ...4 NC 15 NC 15 NC 16 NC 16 GND 17 GND 17 USB_DP0 18 USB_DP 18 USB_DN0 19 USB_DN VBUS0 20 20 19 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 VBUS VDD5 VDD5 GND GND RESETN1 RESETN VDD5_CUT1 VDD5_CUT GND GND AUDIO WAKEUP WAKEUP AUDIO1 NC NC NC NC GND NC NC GND NC NC NC GND GND NC NC USB_DP1 USB_DP VBUS1 VBUS 6 USB_DN1 GND NC 4 5 2 3 13 1 14 15 8 9 5 G...

Page 623: ...1 1 INSTALLATION GUIDE INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT PROCESSOR ...

Page 624: ...ginal cara arriba 1 M PWB del relé del DP 1 1 1 DP 771 solamente Gelieferte Teile A DP 1 B Originalmatte 1 C Befestigungshalterung Breite 38 5 mm 2 DP 770 1 DP 771 Deutsch C Befestigungshalterung Breite 45 mm 1 1 D Winkeleinstellbefestigung 1 E DP Kabelabdeckung 1 F Stift 1 G M4 14TP Schraube 8 H Linke Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 I Rechte Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 J M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ 1 1 K Schild Funk...

Page 625: ...a obtener información más detallada N Speicher DIMM 1GB 1 Die DIMM Speichermodule müssen separat aufgerüstet werden bevor man die Dual Scan Funk tion des DP 771 benutzt Bestellen Sie ein DIMM Speichermodul zusammen mit den Serviceteilen Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in den Anleitungen auf Seite 12 N Memoria DIMM 1GB 1 La memoria DIMM deve essere espansa separatamente prima di usare la Funzione di...

Page 626: ...maßnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Die Abbildungen des DP in der Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP 771 Verfahren Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt den MFP Hauptschalter aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung DP 770 1 Die Zapfen 1 jeder Befestigungshalterung ...

Page 627: ...Befestigungshalter ung C und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter ung C mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen 2 am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun gen in den MFP einsetzen 2 Die Befestigungshalterungen C C mit den 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Installieren des DP 3 Scharnierloch 3 des DP A mit Stift 4 der Befestigungshalterung C ausrichten und DP A auf den MFP stellen 4 Den DP A nach vorn...

Page 628: ...els des DP um 60 Grad 6 Winkeleinstellbefestigung D an der Rück seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Einstellen des Öffnungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 30 Grad 7 Die obere Abdeckung 6 des DP A öffnen 8 Die 3 TP Schrauben 7 und die Schraube 8 entfernen und dann den Riemen 9 von der hinteren Abdeckung 10 abnehmen Dann die hintere Abdeckung 10 des DP A abnehmen 9 An...

Page 629: ...arniers einsetzen 11 Anschlagring 11 an der Wellenkerbe 12 anbringen und Welle befestigen 12 12 Die in Schritt 8 ausgebaute hintere Abdeck ung 10 mittels der 3 TP Schrauben 7 und der Schraube 8 wieder anbringen Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 770 Beim DP 771 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 8 13 Die Schraube 13 entfernen und die Abdeckung 14 des DP Kabelanschlusses abnehmen 14 Die Kap...

Page 630: ...so 13 Vaya al paso 24 de la página 13 15 Die DP Signalleitung 16 durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP Kabelabdeckung E füh ren und dann die DP Signalleitung 16 durch die Abdeckung 14 des DP Kabelan schlusses führen 16 Den Stecker 17 der DP Signalleitung an den Stecker 18 der ISC Leiterplatte anschließen 17 Die DP Kabelabdeckung E an der Abdeck ung 14 des DP Kabelanschlusses anbrin gen und die Abdeck...

Page 631: ...e la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP 21 Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 771 13 Die 8 Schrauben 19 entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung 20 des MFP abnehmen 14 Die Kappe 22 des DP Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung 21 des DP Kabelan schlusses abnehmen Collegare la linea del segnale DP solo DP 771 13 Rimuovere le 8 viti 19 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio superiore posteriore 20 d...

Page 632: ...en la ilustración 16 Instale la cubierta del cable del DP E y la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP 21 15 Die DP Signalleitung 23 durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP Kabelabdeckung E führen Dann die rote CIS Signalleitung 24 durch die linke Öffnung führen HINWEIS Wenn Sie die DP Signalleitung 23 und die CIS Datenleitung 24 durch dieselbe Öffnung füh ren könnte es zu Bildfehlern kommen Achten Sie...

Page 633: ...onector 27 del MFP 17 Den Stecker 23 der DP Signalleitung an den Stecker 25 der ISC Leiterplatte anschließen 18 Entfernen Sie die 2 Befestigungsschrauben 30 und dann die Platte 31 Installieren der DP Relaisleiterplatte 19 Den Stecker 26 an der DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit dem Stecker 27 am MFP verbinden 17 Inserire il connettore 23 della linea del seg nale DP nel connettore 25 sull ISC PWB 18 Rimuo...

Page 634: ...24 al conector 28 PWB del relé del DP M 20 Befestigen Sie die DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit Hilfe der Platte 31 und der 2 Schrauben 30 21 Die CIS Datenleitung 24 an den Stecker 28 auf der DP Relaisleiterplatte M anschließen 20 Fissare la scheda a circuiti stampati di comuni cazione DP M usando la piastra 31 e 2 viti 30 21 Inserire la linea dati CIS 24 nel connettore 28 sulla scheda a circuiti stampa...

Page 635: ... superiore posteriore 20 dell MFP utilizzando le 8 viti 19 メモリーDIMM 1GB の増設手順モノクロ機の 35 枚機 45 枚機 55 枚機のみ 22 主回路基板のメモリースロット YS2 にメモリーDIMM N を挿入するカチッと音がするまで挿入すること 23 ビス 19 8 本で MFP 本体の後上カバー 20 を元通り取り付ける Opérations pour l expansion de la mémoire DIMM 1GB machines monochromes 35 45 et 55 ppm uniquement 22 Insérer la mémoire DIMM N dans la fente mémoire YS2 de la carte de CI principale Insérer à fond ...

Page 636: ... instrucciones para el original 25 Cierre el DP A y fije la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro Befestigen der Originalmatte 24 Die Originalmatte B mit dem Klettband 29 nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B die einen 90 Grad Winkel aufweist mit der linken inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten 25 Den DP A schließen und die Originalmatte B mit dem Klet...

Page 637: ...rta de la bisagra derecha I usando el tornillo M3 8 NEGRO J Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung nur DP 771 Beim DP 770 gehen Sie zum Schritt 28 auf Seite 15 weiter 26 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H anbrin gen 27 Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung I mit der M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ J anbringen Installazione del coperchio cerniera solo DP 771 Per DP 770 procedere con il punto 28 a pagina 15 26 Installare il...

Page 638: ... destino del MFP sobre la eti queta en la cubierta de originales Figura b Anbringen des Schildes 28 Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Alkohol reinigen 29 Das Schild Funktionsanweisung K in der Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben Abbildung a 30 Das Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben L in der Sprache des jeweilige...

Page 639: ...l a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia Funktionsprüfung 1 Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original a vorbereiten auf das 4 Linien b 20 mm von den Kanten des A3 Blattes und 1 Linie c in der Mitte gezeichnet sind 2 Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten 3 Das Original a auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie er...

Page 640: ... 4 Das Original a mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung HINWEIS Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt ist die U068 DP Scan Position zu verstellen Wenn Sie die Scan Position mit U...

Page 641: ...ntral al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la página 26 Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 20 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinte...

Page 642: ... la línea central vea la página 33 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 29 Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 31 Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 5 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 33 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Per c...

Page 643: ...ara el copiado dúplex la separación horizontal de la línea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante 1 Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie ...

Page 644: ...cala aprox 1 0 mm 4 Haga una copia de prueba 2 DP 770 Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung C lösen DP 771 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalter ungen C C lösen 3 Die Einstellschraube 3 an der Rückseite des recht...

Page 645: ...inal B y vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 24 y 25 en la página 13 5 Die obigen Schritte wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 0 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 0 mm liegen 6 Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 14TP Sc...

Page 646: ...nte ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante 1 Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters prüfen Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die fol gende Einstellung durchzuführen Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controll...

Page 647: ... und den Riemen 6 von der hinteren Abdeckung 7 abnehmen Dann die hintere Abdeckung 7 des DP A abnehmen 4 Die Höhe des DP einstellen Lösen Sie die Mutter 8 Für Kopienmuster f Lösen Sie die Ein stellschraube 9 Für Kopienmuster g Die Einstellschraube 9 festziehen Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich ca 0 5 mm 10 Ziehen Sie die Mutter 8 wieder fest 5 Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung 7 wieder a...

Page 648: ...ferencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm 7 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen 8 Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm 7 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia 8 Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la l...

Page 649: ...ithilfe des Originals Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist 1 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Auto Adj wählen und die Start Taste betätigen um ein Original auszudrucken 2 Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start Taste betäti gen 3 Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start Taste betäti gen um die Oberflächeneins...

Page 650: ...brauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1 F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set zen 2 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Faceup Chart2 Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Oberfläche neinstellung ausführen zu lassen 3 Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird ist ...

Page 651: ... servicio 4 Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingeführt wird 5 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP FaceDown Chart2 Nor mal Target Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführ...

Page 652: ...b Scan CIS ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor ación secundaria CIS del escáner DP 771 Überprüfen der Vergrößerung 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Ha...

Page 653: ...exploración principal separación horizontal de la línea 3 dentro de 1 5 3 Die Werte einstellen Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels h j Den Wert erhöhen Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels i k Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 10 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Bezugswert Sub...

Page 654: ...nferior para exploración CIS Überprüfen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm 2 Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden Front Head Zur Einstell...

Page 655: ...valor de referencia Valor de referencia Separación vertical de la línea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel l Den Wert ver ringern Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel m Den Wert erhöhen Änderung pro Schritt 0 17 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels d...

Page 656: ...ral CIS Überprüfen der Mittellinie 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie 1 des Originals a und der Mit tellinie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Einzelkopie 2 0 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Duplexkopie 3 0 mm 2 Zum Ein...

Page 657: ...izontal de la línea de centro 2 para el copiado dúplex 3 0 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel n Den Wert erhöhen Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel o Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 085 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist ...

Page 658: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PAPER FEEDER ...

Page 659: ...s las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 Deutsch E Klemme 1 F Kabelabdeckung 1 G Papierformatplatte 2 H S Tite Schraube M4 8 3 I Papiertypplatte 8 J Anschlag 2 K S Tite Schrauben M4 20 4 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teile...

Page 660: ...des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des Papiereinzugs beginnen 1 Die einzelnen Kassetten herausziehen dann den Hebeplattenanschlag 1 von jeder Kassette entfernen und an der Speicherposi tion 2 anbringen 2 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen 3 Nehmen Sie die untere Papierlade 3 vom MFP ab 4 Die Stift 4 entfernen und die untere Papie...

Page 661: ...so 4 5 Den MFP 7 so auf den Papiereinzug A setzen dass die Stifte 5 vorne links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öffnungen 6 im Boden des MFP ausgeri chtet sind 6 Den MFP 7 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A sichern 7 Die Schiene 8 der unteren Papierlade im MFP herausziehen 8 Den Haken 9 auf der Schiene 8 in die Öff nung 10 der unteren Papierlade 3 einpassen und die untere Papierlade ...

Page 662: ...tor nillo H 10 Die Schraube 11 an der Rückseite des Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung 12 abnehmen 11 Die Schraube 13 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 14 abzunehmen 12 Den Haken 15 auf der Montageplatte C in die Öffnung 16 einpassen und dann die 2 Positionierungsnasen ausrichten 13 Die Montageplatte C mit der Schraube H befestigen 10 Rimuovere la vite 11 nel retro dell unità di alimentazion...

Page 663: ... durch den Kantenschutz klein 18 und das Signalkabel 19 durch den Kantenschutz groß 20 führen und dann den Kantenschutz schließen 15 Das Netzkabel 21 und das Signalkabel 22 an den entsprechenden Steckverbind ern 23 24 des MFP anschließen 16 Die Abdeckung 12 mittels der in Schritt 10 entfernten Schraube 11 wieder anbringen 17 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 25 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 26 von der Welle ...

Page 664: ...20 Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia D con los 2 tornillos H 18 Die rechte Abdeckung 28 des Papiere inzugs öffnen 19 Die 3 Haken 29 an der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit D in die 3 Öffnungen 30 in der Füh rung einpassen 20 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit D mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 18 Aprire il pannello destro 28 dell unità di ali mentazione della carta 19 Inserire i 3 ...

Page 665: ...or de papel 21 Den Steckverbinder 31 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit anschließen 22 Die Klemme E anbringen und das Kabel des Steckverbinders sichern 23 Die Nase 32 der Kabelabdeckung F in die Öffnung 33 des Papiereinzugs einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung F anbringen 24 Die rechte Abdeckung 28 des Papiere inzugs schließen und die untere rechte Abdeckung 25 wieder am MFP einsetzen 25 Die Einstel...

Page 666: ...nillos S Tite M4 20 K de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo 26 Wählen Sie die Öffnungen 38 und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag J mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M4 20 K so an dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen 26 Selezionare i fori 38 ed installare ogni fermo J con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 K in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento 26 転倒防止金具 J が床面に接地するように穴 38 を選択してビス M4 ...

Page 667: ...erencia diferencia izquierda derecha de 1 5 mm o menor Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu siehe Bedienungs anleitung Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Legen ...

Page 668: ...verificar la imagen 4 Ziehen Sie die Papierlade 35 aus dem Papiereinzug und lösen Sie die 4 Schrauben 36 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube 37 um die Cursor Verkantung zu korrigieren 6 Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben 36 wieder an 7 Erstellen Sie zur Überprüfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie 4 Estrarre il cassetto 35 dell unità di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti 36 5 Ruotare...

Page 669: ...de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkanten Timing ist 20 1 5 mm an Position b des korrekten Bilds a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist fol gende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert erhöhen...

Page 670: ... configuración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist 0 5 mm oder weniger an Position f des korrekten Bilds e Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster g Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster h Den ...

Page 671: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER ...

Page 672: ...s las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 Deutsch E Klemme 1 F Kabelabdeckung 1 G Papierformatplatte 2 H S Tite Schraube M4 8 3 I Papiertypplatte 8 J Anschlag 2 K S Tite Schrauben M4 20 4 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teile...

Page 673: ...Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des Papiereinzugs beginnen 1 Die rechte Papierlade 1 und die linke Papierlade 2 herausziehen jeden der Hebeplattenanschläge 3 entfernen und in der vorgesehenen Position verstauen 2 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen 3 Nehmen Sie die untere Papierlade 4 vom MFP ab 4 Die Stift 5 entfernen und die untere Papier lade 4 im...

Page 674: ...so 4 5 Den MFP 8 so auf den Papiereinzug A setzen dass die Stifte 6 vorne links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öffnungen 7 im Boden des MFP ausgeri chtet sind 6 Den MFP 8 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A sichern 7 Die Schiene 9 der unteren Papierlade im MFP herausziehen 8 Den Haken 10 auf der Schiene 9 in die Öff nung 11 der unteren Papierlade 4 einpassen und die untere Papierlade...

Page 675: ...tor nillo H 10 Die Schraube 12 an der Rückseite des Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung 13 abnehmen 11 Die Schraube 14 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 15 abzunehmen 12 Den Haken 16 auf der Montageplatte C in die Öffnung 17 einpassen und dann die 2 Positionierungsnasen ausrichten 13 Die Montageplatte C mit der Schraube H befestigen 10 Rimuovere la vite 12 nel retro dell unità di alimentazion...

Page 676: ... durch den Kantenschutz klein 19 und das Signalkabel 20 durch den Kantenschutz groß 21 führen und dann den Kantenschutz schließen 15 Das Netzkabel 22 und das Signalkabel 23 an den entsprechenden Steckverbind ern 24 25 des MFP anschließen 16 Die Abdeckung 13 mittels der in Schritt 10 entfernten Schraube 12 wieder anbringen 17 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 26 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 27 von der Welle ...

Page 677: ...20 Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia D con los 2 tornillos H 18 Die rechte Abdeckung 29 des Papiere inzugs öffnen 19 Die 3 Haken 30 an der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit D in die 3 Öffnungen 31 in der Füh rung einpassen 20 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit D mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 18 Aprire il pannello destro 29 dell unità di ali mentazione della carta 19 Inserire i 3 ...

Page 678: ...dor de papel 21 Den Steckverbinder 32 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit anschließen 22 Die Klemme E anbringen und das Kabel des Steckverbinders sichern 23 Die Nase 33 der Kabelabdeckung F in die Öffnung 34 des Papiereinzugs einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung F anbringen 24 Die rechte Abdeckung 29 des Papiere inzugs schließen und die untere rechte Abdeckung 26 wieder am MFP einsetzen 25 Die Einste...

Page 679: ...mo J con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 K in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento 26 転倒防止金具 J が床面に接地するように穴 49 を選択してビス M4 20 S タイト K 各 2 本で取り付ける 26 Sélectionner les trous 49 et installer chaque butée J avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 K de sorte que les butées reposent sur le sol 26 在孔 49 处各用 2 颗 M4 20 紧固型 S 螺丝 K 安装限位器 J 使之和地板接触 26 전도방지쇠 J 가 바닥면에 접지될 수 있도록 구멍 49 을 선택해 나사 M4 20 S 타이트 K 각 2 개로 설치합니다 26...

Page 680: ...sor frontal de la plataforma 37 Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu siehe Bedienungs anleitung Ändern des Papierformats nur metrische Spe zifikationen Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit metrischem Maß das F...

Page 681: ... 6 Libere el gancho 41 y quite el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma 42 3 Den vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 so verschieben dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben 39 und unten 38 an der Kassette fluchtet 4 Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel 36 zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen 5 Den hinteren Konsole Cursor 40 auf gleiche Weise verschieben 6 Den Haken 41 lösen und den Hinterkante Cursor 42 der Konsole abne...

Page 682: ...e provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel 7 Den Unter Cursor 43 anheben 8 Auf die Formatanzeige 44 ausrichten den Haken 45 einsetzen und den Hinterkante Cursor 42 der Konsole anbringen Einstellen der Cursor Breite 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 und dem Papier 46 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt wenn das Pa...

Page 683: ... de entre 0 5 y 1 5 mm 3 Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen 47 im vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben 48 lösen Danach den vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 verschieben 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 48 wieder anzie hen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt 3 Inserire un...

Page 684: ...de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkanten Timing ist 20 1 5 mm an Position b des korrekten Bilds a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist fol gende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert erhöhen...

Page 685: ... configuración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist 0 5 mm oder weniger an Position f des korrekten Bilds e Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster g Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster h Den ...

Page 686: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR SIDE DECK ...

Page 687: ...ticas de 65 y 80 ppm Español Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Deutsch I riferimenti per l...

Page 688: ... las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Seitlicher Einzug 1 B Großer Basis Schieber 1 C Kleiner Basis Schieber 1 D Arretierstift 2 E Schalterdruckplatte 1 F M4 8 Schraube 8 G Papierformatplatte 1 H Papiertypplatte 4 I Abdeckplatte 1 J M4 10 Schneidschraube 1 K Film 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten...

Page 689: ...lten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 13 1 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 1 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 2 von der Welle 3 abnehmen und d...

Page 690: ... Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 4 des MFP 3 Öffnen Sie die Platte 6 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 des MFP 4 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 7 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 ab 5 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 9 von der mit tleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 2 Aprire il coperchio 4 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 3 Aprire il pannello 6 sul coperchio destro anteriore 5 dell MFP 4 Rim...

Page 691: ...ben 10 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 8 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 ab 7 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 13 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 12 des Papiereinzugs ab 8 Die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiere inzugs öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 15 von der Welle 16 der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 14...

Page 692: ... und eine Schraube 18 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab Für PF 740 9 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 17 und eine Schraube 20 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab 10 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 21 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 22 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 11 Per PF 730 9 Rimuovere le...

Page 693: ... lugar 24 que se indica en la ilustración Vaya al paso 25 11 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 23 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 1 des MFP ab 12 Zum Anbringen des Films K die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film K dann in der in der Abbildung angegebenen Position 24 anbringen Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 25 11 Rimuovere il pannello 23 dal coperchio destro inferi...

Page 694: ... MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 13 Die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 26 von der Welle 27 abnehmen und dann die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 abnehmen 14 Die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 am MFP öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 29 von der Welle 30 der rechten Abdeck ung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 ab Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 13 Aprire il coperchio destro 1 25 sull MFP Rimuovere la c...

Page 695: ...en Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 31 des MFP 16 Öffnen Sie die Platte 33 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 des MFP 17 Entfernen Sie 4 Schrauben 34 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 ab 18 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 36 von der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 15 Aprire il coperchio 31 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 16 Aprire il pannello 33 sul coperchio destro anteriore 3...

Page 696: ...erta derecha inferior 41 19 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 38 von der unteren rech ten hinteren Abdeckung 37 ab 20 Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben 39 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 35 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 ab 21 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 40 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 41 ab 19 Rimuovere il pannello...

Page 697: ...1 del MFP 25 con un destornillador de pala plana 22 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 42 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 43 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 37 23 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte 44 von der rechten Abdeckung 1 25 des MFP ab 22 Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco 42 dal coperchio destro anteriore 32 e il coper chio...

Page 698: ...e bloqueo D en la parte derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo M4 8 F 24 Zum Anbringen des Films K die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film K dann in der in der Abbildung angegebenen Position 51 anbringen 25 Bringen Sie mit einer M4 8 Schraube F den Arretierungsstift D vorne rechts am MFP an 24 Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola far aderire l...

Page 699: ...grande B 26 Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 8 Schraube F den Arretierungsstift D hinten rechts am MFP an 27 Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis Schieber C auf den großen Basis Schieber B Setzen Sie ihn so auf dass die Biegung 46 am kleinen Basis Schieber C innerhalb der Auflage 45 am Ende des großen Basis Schiebers B anliegt 26 Installare un perno di bloccaggio D sulla parte posteriore destra ...

Page 700: ...icios para tornillo R 28 Stecken Sie den kleinen Basis Schieber C unter den Papiereinzug Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben F so an der Basis 47 dass der Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis Schieber C und dem großen Basis Schieber B 6 2 mm beträgt Bei Modell PF 730 an den mit R markierten Schraublöchern befestigen 28 Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo C sotto l unità di alimentazione carta In...

Page 701: ...ter zu Schritt 35 29 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs wie der an 30 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiereinzugs wieder an 31 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 wieder an 32 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 9 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 33 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 wieder an 34 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdecku...

Page 702: ...g 41 wieder an 36 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 wieder an 37 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 36 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 38 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 wieder an 39 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 wieder an 40 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 wieder an 41 Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Sch neidschraube J die Schalterdruckplatte E Ins...

Page 703: ...tallare il coperchio I utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 F 42 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でベーススライダー大 B にサイドフィーダー A を取り付けるその際ベーススライダー大 B の取付板の平行線 48 にビス M4 8 F のセンターがくるように取り付ける 43 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でカバープレート I を取り付ける 42 Fixer le dispositif du plateau d alimentation latéral A à la grande règle de base B à l aide de 2 vis M4 8 F Procéder de sorte que l axe des vis M4 8 F recouvre la ligne horizontale 48 du plateau de montage s...

Page 704: ...amente Para obtener más información con sulte la Guía de uso 44 Schließen Sie das Signalkabel 49 für den seitlichen Einzug am Papiereinzug Steckverbinder 50 an 45 Drücken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug um ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu sie...

Page 705: ...erale 2 Rimuovere la vite 1 e quindi rimuovere il fermo 2 用紙サイズ変更センチ仕様のみ出荷時インチ仕様は Letter センチ仕様は A4 に設定されていますサイズを B5 に変更する場合は次の手順をおこなってください 1 サイドフィーダーのカセットを引き出す 2 ビス 1 1 本を外しストッパー 2 を取り外す Modification du format du papier pour spécifications métriques seulement À expédition les modèles à mesure en pouces sont réglés sur le format Letter et les modèles à mesure métrique sur le format A4 Pour p...

Page 706: ... 3 6 Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma 6 de la misma forma 3 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 3 und nehmen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 heraus 4 Versetzen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 um die Formatmarkierung 5 am Boden der Papierlade anzupassen die äußerste ist A4 die innerste ist B5 5 Befestigen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 mit der Schraube 3 6 Versetzen Sie den hinteren Konsole ...

Page 707: ...U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel 7 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 7 und nehmen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 her aus 8 Versetzen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 um die Formatmarkierung 9 am Boden der Papierlade anzupassen 9 Befestigen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 mit der Schraube 7 10 Bringen Sie den Anschlag 2 wieder mit der Schraube 1 an 11 Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papi...

Page 708: ...o grande puede provocar prob lemas con la alimentación torcida de papel Einstellen der Cursor Breite 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und dem Papier 10 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 0 mm liegt wenn das Papier 10 am hinteren Konsole Cursor 6 anliegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen Eine zu kleine Cursor Breite kann den Papiereinz...

Page 709: ...l papel sea de entre 0 5 y 1 0 mm 3 Lösen Sie 2 Einstellschrauben 11 am vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und versetzen Sie den Cur sor 4 unter Beobachtung der Skale 12 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 11 wieder anziehen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 0 mm liegt 3 Allentare le 2 viti di regolazione 11 sul cursore frontale del de...

Page 710: ...iguración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte 1 eines korrekten Bilds a und der Mitte 2 eines Prüfmusters Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 0 mm 1 Stellen Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 ein Wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette5 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster b Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert verringern 3 Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start Ta...

Page 711: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR 1000 SHEETS FINISHER ...

Page 712: ...de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Dokument Finishers 1 B Auswerffach 1 C Obere Grundplatte 1 D Untere Grundplatte 1 Deutsch E Verbindungsplatte 1 F Kabelführung 1 G Auswerfführung 1 H Heftklammermagazin 1 I M4 8 Schraube 3 J M4 30 Schraube 2 K M4 10 Schraube schwarz 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Fi...

Page 713: ...de la parte posterior de la bandeja de salida B en los orificios 2 del elevador del finaliza dor de documentos A HINWEIS Das Gerätezusatz AK 730 muss installiert werden bevor man den Dokument Finisher installiert Verfahren Vor dem Einbau des Dokument Finishers muss der MFP Hauptschalter aktiviert und das Netzk abel von der Steckdose abgezogen sein 1 Setzen Sie die 2 Haken 1 zur Befestigung an der ...

Page 714: ... cubierta izquierda 2 Befestigen Sie die obere Grundplatte C und die untere Grundplatte D mit M4 8 Schrauben I 3 Bringen Sie die Auswerfführung G an indem Sie die 2 Auswerfführungsstifte 3 in die Öffnungen des MFP stecken 4 Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte E mit 2 M4 30 Schrauben J am MFP an 5 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 25 von der linken Abdeckung ab 2 Fissare la piastra di messa a terra s...

Page 715: ...o se describe en la página 7 6 Entfernen Sie das Band und die hintere Abdeckung 4 7 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 5 und ziehen Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 nach außen her aus Die Verbindungsöffnungen 7 sind nun sichtbar 8 Stecken Sie die 2 Stifte 8 an der Verbind ungsplatte E in die Verbindungsöffnungen 7 des Dokument Finishers um den Doku ment Finisher mit dem MFP zu verbinden Falls Sie den Dokument Finis...

Page 716: ...ctela al conec tor 10 de la MFP 9 Drücken Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 ganz ein damit die Fixierrahmenrippen in die Stiftschlitze greifen 10 Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 mit der in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube 5 11 Bringen Sie die Kabelführung F mit der M4 8 Schraube I an 12 Führen Sie die Signalleitung 9 durch die Kabelführung F und schließen Sie sie am Steckverbinder 10 des MFP an 9 Spingere com...

Page 717: ...l 12 13 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 4 mit der M4 10 Schraube K an 14 Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 11 am MFP an Die beim Installieren des AK 730 entfernte Abdeckung 15 Öffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 12 des Dokument Finishers und setzen Sie das Heftklammermagazin H ein 16 Schließen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 12 13 Installare il pannello anteriore 4 utilizzando la vite M4 10 K 14 In...

Page 718: ...en con las especificaciones utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la altura Einstellen der Höhe 1 Vergewissern Sie sich dass die jeweilige Höhe der Stifte 8 der am MFP ange brachten Verbindungsplatte und die Verbind ungsöffnungen 7 am Dokument Finisher den nachstehenden Vorgaben entsprechen Korrekt Der Durchmesser a des Stifts 8 befindet sich im Höhenbereich b des Kurvenabschnitts 13 Nic...

Page 719: ...ontal y derecho posterior del finaliza dor de documentos 2 Entfernen Sie sämtliche Schrauben 14 und nehmen Sie die Vorderfußabdeckung 15 und die Hinterfußabdeckung 16 3 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 17 um den Schlüssel 18 abzunehmen 4 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 19 vorne rechts und hinten rechts am Dokument Finisher 2 Rimuovere ciascuna delle viti 14 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del piede anteriore ...

Page 720: ...2 no son iguales uti lice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la separación 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben 20 mit dem Schlüssel 18 um die Höhe des Dokument Fin ishers einzustellen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 6 Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben 19 wieder an und verstauen Si...

Page 721: ...ta de la pata frontal 15 y la cubierta de la pata posterior 16 8 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 23 vorne links und hinten links am Dokument Finisher 9 Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben 24 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein um die Höhe des Dokument Finishers zu korrigieren Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem ...

Page 722: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del papel Einstellen der Heftposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus doppelt geheftet 3 Prüfen Sie ob die Heftposition außermittig ist Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen Bezugswert 78 5 mm 2 5 mm von ...

Page 723: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del pape 4 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Staple HP 5 Die Werte einstellen Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts a abgesta pelt wird Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts b abgestapelt wird Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert 6 Eine Testkopie erstellen 7 Wiederholen Sie die S...

Page 724: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR 4000 SHEETS FINISHER ...

Page 725: ...ticas de 65 y 80 ppm Español Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Deutsch I riferimenti per l...

Page 726: ...tiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Dokument Finishers 1 B Auswerffach 1 C Obere Grundplatte 1 D Grundanschlussplatte 1 E Grundfeder 1 F Verbindungsplatte 1 G Kabelführung 1 H Auswerfführung 1 I Heftklammermagazin 1 J M4 8 Schraube 4 K M4 30 Schraube 2 L M4 10 Schraube schwarz 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti...

Page 727: ...sterior de la bandeja de salida B en los orificios 2 del elevador del finaliza dor de documentos A HINWEIS Bei der Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse muss der Gerätezusatz AK 730 installiert werden bevor man den Doku ment Finisher installiert Verfahren Vor dem Einbau des Dokument Finishers muss der MFP Hauptschalter aktiviert und das Netzk abel von der Steckdose abgezogen sein...

Page 728: ...l finalizador de documen tos usando un tornillo M4 8 J Vaya al paso 7 2 Befestigen Sie die obere Grundplatte C mit einer M4 8 Schraube J Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 3 Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder E mit einer M4 8 Schraube J an der mit 55 bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte D 4 Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte D mit einer M4 8 Schraube J mittig an der Unterseite ...

Page 729: ...olador 5 Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 3 Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder E mit einer M4 8 Schraube J an der mit 65 bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte D 4 Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte D mit einer M4 8 Schraube J vorne an der Unterseite des Dokument Finishers an Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Lei...

Page 730: ...Bringen Sie die Auswerfführung H an indem Sie die 2 Auswerfführungsstifte 6 in die Öffnungen des MFP stecken 8 Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte F mit 2 M4 30 Schrauben K am MFP an Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leis tungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 10 9 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 30 von der linken Abdeckung ab 10 En...

Page 731: ... paso 11 11 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 8 und ziehen Sie den Fixierrahmen 9 nach außen her aus Die Verbindungsöffnungen 10 sind nun sichtbar 12 Stecken Sie die 2 Stifte 11 an der Verbind ungsplatte F in die Verbindungsöffnungen 10 des Dokument Finishers um den Doku ment Finisher mit dem MFP zu verbinden Falls Sie den Dokument Finisher nicht anschließen können sollten Sie die Höhe wie auf Seite 8 be...

Page 732: ...osterior 7 por medio del tornillo M4 10 L 15 Bringen Sie die Kabelführung G mit der M4 8 Schraube J an 16 Führen Sie die Signalleitung 12 durch die Kabelführung G und schließen Sie sie am Steckverbinder 13 des MFP an 17 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 7 mit der M4 10 Schraube L an 15 Installare la guida cavi G utilizzando la vite M4 8 J 16 Far passare il cavo del segnale 12 attra verso la guida ...

Page 733: ...dares 18 Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 3 am MFP an Bei Installation an MFP der mittleren Leis tungsklasse die beim Installieren des AK 730 abgenommene Abdeckung 19 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 14 des Dokument Finishers und setzen Sie das Heftklammermagazin I ein 20 Schließen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 14 Einstellen der Höhe 1 Vergewissern Sie sich dass die jeweilige Höhe der Sti...

Page 734: ...ite el tornillo 16 y abra la cubierta frontal inferior 17 Korrekt Der Durchmesser A des Stifts 11 befindet sich im Höhenbereich B des Kurvenabschnitts 15 Nicht korrekt Der Durchmesser A des Stifts 11 ragt über den Höhenbereich B des Kurvenab schnitts 15 hinaus Falls die Höhen nicht korrekt sind müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen 2 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 14 des Dokument Finishers...

Page 735: ...del finaliza dor de documentos 4 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 18 und nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung 19 ab 5 Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben 20 und nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung 21 ab 6 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 22 um den Schlüssel 23 abzunehmen 7 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 24 vorne rechts und hinten rechts am Dokument Finisher 4 Rimuovere le 2 viti 18 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del pied...

Page 736: ...7 no son iguales uti lice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la separación 8 Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben 25 mit dem Schlüssel 23 um die Höhe des Dokument Fin ishers einzustellen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 9 Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben 24 wieder an und verstauen Si...

Page 737: ...ubierta de la pata 19 y la cubierta posterior inferior 21 11 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 28 vorne links und hinten links am Dokument Finisher 12 Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben 29 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein um die Höhe des Dokument Finishers zu korrigieren Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzei gersinn wird der Dokument Finisher ange hoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem U...

Page 738: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del papel Einstellen der Heftposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus doppelt geheftet 3 Prüfen Sie ob die Heftposition außermittig ist Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen Bezugswert 78 5 mm 2 5 mm von ...

Page 739: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del pape 4 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Staple HP 5 Die Werte einstellen Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts a abgesta pelt wird Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts b abgestapelt wird Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert 6 Eine Testkopie erstellen 7 Wiederholen Sie die S...

Page 740: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT ...

Page 741: ...ierta frontal superior 1 K Cubierta de conexiones izquierda 1 Gelieferte Teile A Antriebseinheit 1 B Papiereinzugseinheit 1 C Abdeckung der Papiereinzugseinheit 1 D Kantenschutz 1 Deutsch E Hintere linke Stütze 1 F Linke Scanner Abdeckung 1 G Vordere linke Stütze 1 H Auswerfeinheit 1 I Kabelhalter 2 J Obere vordere Abdeckung 1 K Linke Verbindungsabdeckung 1 Parti di fornitura A Unità guida 1 B Uni...

Page 742: ...tado y que su cable de ali mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corriente L Linke Abdeckung 1 M Obere linke Abdeckung 1 N Papierfördereinheit 1 O M4 8 Schraube 7 P M4 20 Schraube 4 Q P Tite Schraube M3 8 1 R Untere Verbindungsabdeckung 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Vor dem Einbau des AK 730 muss der MFP Hauptschalter ausgeschal...

Page 743: ...erda del escáner 6 Verfahren 1 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 2 in der linken ISU Abdeckung 1 2 Drücken Sie die Haken 3 oben und unten ein und öffnen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeck ung 4 3 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 5 im Innern der Schnittstellenabdeckung 4 und nehmen Sie die linke Scanner Abdeckung 6 ab Procedura 1 Rimuovere le 2 viti 2 sul coperchio ISU sin istro 1 2 Spingere i ganci 3 superiore...

Page 744: ...Sie die vordere Abdeckung 7 am MFP 5 Ziehen Sie die Papierfördererabdeckung 8 heraus 6 Heben Sie das Bedienfeld 9 in die oberste Position falls es gesenkt ist 7 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 11 von der Lüfterabdeckung 10 8 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 12 und ziehen Sie die obere rechte Abdeckung 13 leicht nach außen während Sie gleichzeitig die vordere rechte Abdeckung 14 abnehmen 9 Entfernen Sie die A...

Page 745: ...s M4 8 negro 16 quitados en el paso 10 10 Entfernen Sie die 2 M4 8 schwarz Schrauben 16 und nehmen Sie die hintere Fachabdeckung 17 und die Scanner Bode nabdeckung 18 ab 11 Setzen Sie den Haken 19 an der Oberseite der Antriebseinheit A und den Vorsprung 20 an der Unterseite in die entsprechenden Positionierungsöffnungen 21 22 der Rückplatte ein und sichern Sie die Antriebseinheit mit den 2 in Schr...

Page 746: ...nto del actuador 12 Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung der Papierein zugseinheit C von der Papiereinzugs einheit B ab 13 Setzen Sie den Vorsprung 23 an der Papiereinzugseinheit B in die Öffnung 24 der Antriebseinheit A ein und setzen Sie den Vorsprung 25 in die Öffnung 26 im MFP Rahmen ein um die Papiereinzugsein heit B anzubringen Drücken Sie die Papiereinzugseinheit B nach rechts und drücken Sie den Vorsp...

Page 747: ... en posición 14 Bringen Sie den Kantenschutz D an der Seitenplatte an führen Sie das Kabel von der Antriebseinheit A durch den Kanten schutz D und befestigen Sie es 15 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 28 der hin teren linken Stütze E in die Öffnungen 29 der Seitenplatte ein und sichern Sie die hin tere linke Stütze E mit der M4 8 Schraube O 16 Setzen Sie das Klemmschellenband 30 am Kabel von der Antrie...

Page 748: ...os M4 20 P 17 Setzen Sie den Haken 32 an der linken Scanner Abdeckung F in die Öffnung der Seitenplatte und sichern Sie die linke Scan ner Abdeckung F mit der M4 8 Schraube O 18 Befestigen Sie die 2 Schrauben 2 an der linken ISU Abdeckung 1 19 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 33 der vor deren linken Stütze G in die Öffnungen der linken Abdeckung am MFP ein und befesti gen Sie die vordere linke Stütze G...

Page 749: ... aus dass der Schienenabschnitt 34 im MFP sitzt setzen Sie den Vorsprung 35 auf der Rückseite in die Öff nung der Seitenplatte ein und setzen Sie dann das Vorderteil auf den Plattenabschnitt 37 an der vorderen linken Stütze G HINWEIS Achten Sie beim Montieren der Auswerfeinheit H darauf dass das Kabel 36 der Antriebseinheit nicht eingeklemmt wird 21 Ziehen Sie die in Schritt 19 provisorisch angezo...

Page 750: ...rnillo M4 8 O 23 Stecken Sie die 3 Stecker 38 in die Aus werfeinheit H und den MFP 24 Befestigen Sie die Kabel mit den 2 Kabelhal tern I 25 Positionieren Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung J so dass das Schraubengehäuse 39 nicht die vordere linke Stütze G berührt und richten Sie die Vorsprünge 40 auf die 2 Öffnungen an der rechten Seite der oberen vorderen Abdeckung J aus bevor Sie die obere vordere ...

Page 751: ...e Abdeckung 14 mit der in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube 12 an Befestigen Sie die Lüfterabdeckung 10 mit der in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube 11 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Stecker auf der Innenseite der Lüfterabdeckung 10 nicht abgetrennt wurde 27 Setzen Sie die Abdeckung C der Papiere inzugseinheit in die Papiereinzugseinheit B ein 28 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 41 an der linken Verbindungsabd...

Page 752: ...deckung 42 Bringen Sie nach der Installation des Doku ment Finishers wieder die Schnittstellenab deckung 42 an 30 Bringen Sie die linke Abdeckung L mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten 2 Schrauben 5 an 31 Öffnen Sie die Auswerfabdeckung 43 32 Bringen Sie die obere linke Abdeckung M wieder an und schließen Sie die Auswerfab deckung 43 33 Bringen Sie die untere Verbindungsabdeck ung R mit den 2 M4 20 Sch...

Page 753: ...2 Schlittenschienen 44 aus dem MFP heraus 35 Richten Sie die 4 Haken 45 der Schlitten schienen 44 auf die Einkerbungen der Papierfördereinheit N aus und setzen Sie die Papierfördereinheit N auf die Schlitten schienen 44 36 Verschieben Sie die Schlittenschienen 44 nach hinten und befestigen Sie die Papierfördereinheit N mit den 4 Haken 45 Vergewissern Sie sich durch die Öffnung 46 dass die Haken or...

Page 754: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR CENTER FOLDING UNIT ...

Page 755: ...to 1 Gelieferte Teile A Mittenfalteinheit 1 B Vordere Schiene 1 C Hintere Schiene 1 D Ausgabeanschlag 1 Deutsch E Vordere Seitenabdeckung 1 F Hintere Seitenabdeckung 1 G Ausgabestapelfach 1 H Ausgabefach 1 I Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 J Stift 1 K M4 8 Schraube 11 L M4 10 Schraube schwarz 2 M M4 12 Schraube 4 N Sperrplatte 2 O Schellenband 1 P Führung 1 Q D7 Aufkleber 1 R Bedienungsaufkleber...

Page 756: ...und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Verfahren Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit beginnen stellen Sie sicher dass der Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Bringen Sie den Dokument Finisher zuerst und dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an 1 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 1 des Dokument Finishers ...

Page 757: ...edia inferior 9 3 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 4 und nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung 5 ab 4 Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben 6 und nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung 7 ab 5 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 8 und nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung 9 ab 3 Rimuovere le 2 viti 4 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del piede 5 4 Rimuovere le 3 viti 6 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio inferiore posteriore 7...

Page 758: ...la misma forma 6 Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten N an den vorderen und hinteren Stützen mit jeweils einer M4 8 Schraube K 7 Setzen Sie den Haken 11 der vorderen Schiene B in die Aussparung 10 vorne am Dokument Finisher ein und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor sprung 13 an der vorderen Schiene B in die Öff nung 12 des Dokument Finishers ein 8 Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene B mit den 2 M4 12 Schraub...

Page 759: ... el cable 17 La cinta de fijación 18 se quita en el paso 15 10 Setzen Sie die linken Rollen 14 an der Vorderseite und Rückseite der Mittenfalteinheit A auf die Bahnen 15 an den Innenseiten der Schienen und rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung Die mittleren Rollen 16 rollen nun auf die Schienen 11 Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit A entlang den Schienen in den Dokument Finisher ein HINWEIS...

Page 760: ...dor I usando 4 tornillos M4 8 K 12 Lösen Sie den Verriegelungshebel 19 und ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit A zur linken Seite des Dokument Finishers heraus 13 Richten Sie die Öffnungen 21 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit I auf die 2 Vorsprünge 20 des Dokument Finishers aus Montieren Sie so dass die Lippe 22 am oberen Rahmen der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument Fini...

Page 761: ... 15 Entfernen Sie das Klebeband 18 für die Kabelführung 17 und stecken Sie die Rändelschraube J in die Kabelführung 17 wobei der Rahmen 25 zwischen den 2 Vorsprüngen 24 liegen muss HINWEIS Stecken Sie die Rändelschraube J ein um die Kabel in der Kabelführung 17 zu halten 16 Schrauben Sie die Rändelschraube J in den Dokument Finisher um die Kabelführung 17 zu verankern 15 Rimuovere il nastro di fis...

Page 762: ...7 Montieren Sie das Massekabel 26 mit einer M4 8 Schraube K an den Rahmen 18 Bringen Sie das Schellenband O an den Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den Rahmen ein 19 Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder 27 mit den Steckverbindern 28 des Dokument Finishers 20 Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder 29 mit dem Steckverbinder 30 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit I 21 Richten Sie die Öffnungen 32 an 2 S...

Page 763: ...e Auswurfabdeckung 33 24 Hängen Sie den Vorsprung 34 und den Haken 35 der vorderen Seitenabdeckung E in die Mittenfalteinheit A ein Befestigen Sie die vordere Seitenabdeckung E mit einer M4 10 Schraube schwarz L 25 Hängen Sie den Vorsprung 36 und den Haken 37 der hinteren Seitenabdeckung F in die Mittenfalteinheit A ein Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung F mit einer M4 10 Schraube schwarz ...

Page 764: ...de salida H 28 Cierre la cubierta de expulsión 33 26 Stecken Sie die 2 Rändelschrauben 38 des Ausgabefachs H in die Öffnungen der Mittenfal teinheit A ein um das Fach zu installieren 27 Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach G am Ausgabefach H an 28 Schließen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung 33 26 Inserire i 2 perni 38 sul vassoio di uscita H nei fori sull unità di piegatura centrale A per instal lare il vasso...

Page 765: ...eta D7 Q en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustración 29 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 39 auf der Rückseite des Ausgabeanschlags D in die mit Kreis bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit A ein Setzen Sie die 3 Haken 40 des Ausgabeanschlags D in die Öffnungen 41 der Mittenfaltein heit A ein 30 Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber Q an der abgebildeten Stelle an 29 Inserire le 2 sporgenze 39 sulla parte...

Page 766: ...ierre la cubierta frontal inferior 3 y la cubierta frontal superior 1 31 Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber R an der abgebildeten Stelle an 32 Bringen Sie die Fußabdeckung 5 und die untere hintere Abdeckung 7 wieder an 33 Schließen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung 3 und die obere vordere Abdeckung 1 31 Far aderire l etichetta di operazione R alla posizione mostrata nella figura 32 Reinstallare la ...

Page 767: ...es 3 Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Mittenfalt Heftposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand a zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier mitte Falls der Abstand a größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert a 2 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Booklet und Staple Pos 2 Die W...

Page 768: ...ara confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand b zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit tenfaltposition Falls der Abstand b größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert b A4 Letter Papierlänge 1 2 2 mm A3 Ledger B4 Papierlänge 1 2 3 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie...

Page 769: ...cla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand c zwischen der Papierkante und der zweiten Faltposition Falls der Abstand c größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert c 7 0 2 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Booklet und Three Fold 2 Die Werte ei...

Page 770: ...es Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 771: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR MAILBOX ...

Page 772: ...gar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Mailbox 1 B Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte 1 C Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte 1 D Kopienausgabefächer 7 Deutsch E M4 12 Schraube 2 F Fachnamenaufkleber für Benutzer 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Casella posta...

Page 773: ...arte superior del finalizador 1 utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar Verfahren Schalten Sie vor der Installation der Mailbox unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Netzsteck dose 1 Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung 2 und die hintere obere Abdeckung 3 an der Oberseite des Finishers 1 mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen P...

Page 774: ...de correo A hacia arriba para asegurarse de que el buzón de correo A no queda suspendido 2 Setzen Sie die Haken 4 an der Vorder und Rückseite der Mailbox A in die Öffnungen 5 vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers 1 ein wie in der Abbildung dargestellt und bringen Sie die Mailbox A am Finisher 1 an Hinweis Heben Sie die Mailbox A vorne und hinten etwas an um sicher zu stellen dass die Mai...

Page 775: ...ar la cubierta trasera 6 3 Befestigen Sie die Vorderseite und die Rück seite der Mailbox A mit einer M4 12 Schraube E am Finisher 4 Nehmen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 6 der Mailbox A ab 5 Entfernen Sie das Band vom Steckverbinder 7 der Mailbox A und stecken Sie ihn in den Steckverbinder 8 am Finisher 6 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 6 wieder an 3 Fissare ciascuna parte anteriore e posteriore dell...

Page 776: ...anera la cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera C en el finaliza dor 7 Setzen Sie die 2 Haken 9 an der vorderen Abdeckung der Montageplatte B für die Mailbox in den Finisher ein um die Abdeck ung B zu installieren 8 Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte C am Fin isher an 7 Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci 9 posizionati sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteri...

Page 777: ...ienda el interruptor prin cipal del MFP para verificar el funciona miento 9 Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer D in den Ausgabeabschnitt der Mailbox A ein beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs D zusammen um es etwas zu biegen und setzen Sie das Fach ein indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte 10 in die Rundlöcher 11 vorne und hinten an...

Page 778: ...es Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 779: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PUNCH UNIT ...

Page 780: ...lieferte Teile A Locherführung 1 B Lochereinheit 1 C Motoreinheit 1 D Anschlagring 1 Deutsch E Feder 1 F Locher PWB 1 G Lochungsabfallbehälter 1 H M3 8 Passstift Verbundschrauben 3 I Aufkleberbogen 1 J Film 1 K Kleine Klemme für DF 770 1 L Große Klemme für DF 790 1 M Ferritkern 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Guid...

Page 781: ...ite la cubierta trasera superior 4 Verfahren Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit beginnen stellen Sie sicher dass der Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Bringen Sie den Dokument Finisher zuerst und dann erst die Lochereinheit an Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3 1 Die Schraub...

Page 782: ...de la guía 10 hacia fuera Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 790 1 Die Schraube 5 entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung 6 abnehmen 2 Die 3 Schrauben 7 entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 abnehmen Anbringen der Lochereinheit 3 Die Schraube 9 entfernen und die Führung 10 nach außen ziehen Rimozione del coperchio DF 790 1 Rimuovere la vite 5 e quindi rimuovere il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 2 ...

Page 783: ... la parte ombreggiata 38 del motore illustrata per l adesione della pellicola J far aderire la pellicola 4 モーター斜線部 38 の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後フィルム J を貼り付ける 4 Après avoir utilisé de l alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée 38 sur laquelle le film J est apposé coller ce film 4 用酒精清洁电机斜侧处 38 的粘贴位置后粘贴胶片 J 4 모터 사선부 38 의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 필름 J 을 부착합니다 4 Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la part...

Page 784: ...del finalizador de documentos 12 6 Inserte la perforadora B en el finalizador de documentos 5 Die Locherführung A so einsetzen dass die Vorderkante der Führung 11 unter dem Rahmen 12 des Dokument Finishers liegt 6 Die Lochereinheit B in den Dokument Fin isher einsetzen 5 Installare la guida perforazione A in modo che il bordo principale della guida 11 sia sotto il telaio 12 della finitrice di docu...

Page 785: ...unidad motriz C con los 2 tornil los H 7 Die Lochereinheit B leicht anheben und den Haken 13 an der Motoreinheit C in die Nut 14 des Dokument Finishers einsetzen Dabei auch die Stange 15 an der Motoreinheit C in die Öffnung 16 der Lochereinheit B einstecken 8 Die Motoreinheit C mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 7 Sollevare leggermente l unità di perforazione B ed inserire il gancio 13 sull unità motor...

Page 786: ...la unidad motriz 19 9 Den Anschlagring D auf die Stange 15 der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder E zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit einsetzen 10 Das Kabel 17 der Lochereinheit durch den Kantenschutz 18 der Motoreinheit führen 11 Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit 19 anschließen 9 Inserire l anello di bloccaggio D sull asta 15 dell unità motore ed in...

Page 787: ...tallation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12 12 Die 2 Haken 20 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 21 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 23 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 22 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 24 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F fe...

Page 788: ...ora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 27 der DF Haupt PWB 26 anschließen 16 Die kleine Klemme K am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 27 sulla ...

Page 789: ...a cubierta delantera superior 28 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 4 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 2 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 4 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 2 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 28 ed inserire lo ...

Page 790: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración B C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 28 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen B C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 791: ...oración F Installation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 790 12 Die 2 Haken 29 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 30 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 32 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 31 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 33 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F festziehen 14 Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck...

Page 792: ...adora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 36 der DF Haupt PWB 35 anschließen 16 Die große Klemme L am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 36 sulla...

Page 793: ...a cubierta delantera superior 37 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 6 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 8 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 37 ed inserire lo ...

Page 794: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración A C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 37 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen A C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 795: ...ón Einstellen der Lochungsposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen 3 Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte ist die Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist 2 Die W...

Page 796: ...ón Valor de referencia c Sistema métrico 13 mm en pulgadas 9 5 mm Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt Den Einstellwert erhöhen Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt...

Page 797: ...tanzlochposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Width 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert verringern Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert erhöhen 3 Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start Taste bestätigen Bezugswert Metrischer Abstand d 80 mm 0 5 e 40 mm 2 Abstand in Z...

Page 798: ...s instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 770 DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 770 DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 799: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR INNER JOB SEPARATOR ...

Page 800: ...1 2 3 A B ...

Page 801: ...7 8 4 5 6 ...

Page 802: ...11 9 10 ...

Page 803: ...A 1 2 3 3 2 14 15 12 13 16 ...

Page 804: ...B 19 17 18 ...

Page 805: ...21 22 20 ...

Page 806: ...26 27 23 24 28 25 ...

Page 807: ...30 29 ...

Page 808: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR RIGHT JOB SEPARATOR ...

Page 809: ...5 1 2 3 4 5 7 7 6 A B C A B ...

Page 810: ...9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 Ԙ ԙ Ԙ ԙ C ...

Page 811: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FAX System ...

Page 812: ...eiterplatte finden Sie auf Seite 1 Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiterplatte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollf...

Page 813: ...de FAX 1 F Tecla de FAX 1 G Cubierta de la tecla de FAX 1 J Memoria DIMM 16 MB 1 Opción K Memoria DIMM 128 MB 1 H y I no se suministran Cuando instale el fax Dual se necesitan A B C Gelieferte Teile A FAX Leiterplatte 1 C Verschlusskappe 1 D Alphabetaufkleber 1 E Aufkleber für FAX Bedienungsabschnitt 1 F FAX Taste 1 G FAX Tastenabdeckung 1 J Speicher DIMM 16 MB 1 Option K Speicher DIMM 128 MB 1 B ...

Page 814: ...rsichtsmaßnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des MFP aus und trennen Sie den MFP vom Netz bevor Sie das Faxsystem installieren Verfahren Installation der DIMM Speichermodule 1 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab 2 Setzen Sie das DIMM Speichermodul J oder das optionale DIMM...

Page 815: ... 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit den 2 Schrauben 1 an Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 4 Die Abdeckung 4 öffnen 5 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschubs OPT1 ent fernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiter platte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 3 Ricollocare il coperchio 2 utilizzando le 2 viti 1 Rimozi...

Page 816: ...e FAX en el FAX dual vea la página 17 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Fin isher installiert ist 4 Die Abdeckung 4 entfernen 5 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschubs OPT1 ent fernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiter platte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 Rimozione del coperchio vano Per MFP a veloc...

Page 817: ...queta 7 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 6 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 5 ausgebauten Schrauben 6 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetze...

Page 818: ...de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 7 Telefonmodulkabel 8 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefon dose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del tele fono 7 Inserire il cavo connettor...

Page 819: ...os modelos de 120 V asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 10 Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon 8 Das Telefonmodulkabel 9 in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa rate Telefon anschließen Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange schlossen wird die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen falls vo...

Page 820: ...Quite las cubiertas 11 y tienda el cable conector modular como se muestra en la ilustración 11 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas 11 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse für Neuseeland Modell 9 Dieses Verfahren nur für das Neuseeland Modell anwenden Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 10 Die Abdeckungen 11 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen 11 ...

Page 821: ... finalizador está instalado 12 Vuelva a instalar la cubierta 4 MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 12 Die Abdeckung 4 schließen Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Finisher installiert ist 12 Die Abdeckung 4 wieder anbringen Per MFP a velocità media 12 Chiudere il coperchio 4 Per MFP a velocità alta e quando la finitrice è installata 12 Reinstallare il coperchio 4 中速 MFP の場合 12 カバー 4 を閉める高...

Page 822: ... como se muestra a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de tra bajo 13 14 para quitarlas Installieren der FAX Taste 13 Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen 12 bezeichneten Spitze einschieben und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 verschieben um sie dann abzunehmen Installazione del tasto FAX 13 Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia 12 come m...

Page 823: ...jo 16 16 Quite la cubierta de la sección de la tecla de FAX 17 14 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 entfernen 15 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 entfernen 16 Die Abdeckung 17 des FAX Tastenbe reichs entfernen 14 Rimuovere il pannello trasparente 15 15 Rimuovere il foglio 16 del pannello opera tivo 16 Rimuovere la copertura 17 della sezione tasto FAX 14 クリアパネル 15 を取り外す 15 操作パネルシート 16 を取り外す 16 FAX キー部分のカバー 17 を取り外...

Page 824: ... G 17 Instale la tecla de FAX F 18 Instale la cubierta de la tecla de FAX G 17 Die FAX Taste F anbringen 18 Die Abdeckung G der FAX Taste anbrin gen 17 Installare il tasto FAX F 18 Installare la copertura G del tasto FAX 17 FAX キー F を取り付ける 18 FAX キーカバー G を取り付ける 17 安装 FAX 键 F 18 安装 FAX 键盖板 G 17 FAX 키 F 를 부착합니다 18 FAX 키커버 G 를 부착합니다 F ...

Page 825: ...e la etiqueta de la sección de funcionamiento del FAX E del idioma correspondiente Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber ausgenommen 100 V Modelle 19 Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie 16 mit Alkohol abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber D hier anbringen In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden Anbringen des Aufkl...

Page 826: ...ransparente 15 23 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 13 14 21 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 anbringen 22 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 wieder anbrin gen 23 Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 wie der anbringen 21 Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 16 22 Reinstallare il pannello trasparente 15 23 Reinstallare i coperchi 13 14 del pannello operativo 21 操作パネルシート 16 を取り付ける 22 クリアパネル 15 を取...

Page 827: ... los modelos de 110 V 24 Realice el procedimiento sólo para los modelos de Chino o 110 V Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen für China nur 110 V Modelle 24 Dieses Verfahren nur für die China oder 110 VModelle anwenden Applicare l etichetta di approvazione per Cina solo per i modelli da 110 V 24 Eseguire questa procedura solo per modelli da Cina o 110 V 規格ラベルの貼り付け中国 110V 仕様のみ 24 この手順は中国 110V 仕様のみお...

Page 828: ... de circuitos de FAX a OPT2 vaya a los siguientes procedimientos Cuando no lo instala vaya a la página 23 Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen nur für Australien Neuseeland Modell 25 Dieses Verfahren nur für das Australien Neuseeland Modell anwenden Wenn das optionale Dual FAX installiert wird Hinzufügen der FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 mit den folgenden Verfahren fortfahren Erfolgt diese Installation ...

Page 829: ... y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT2 3 Installieren des Dual FAX Die mitgelieferten Teile sind auf Seite 1 aufgelistet Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 1 Die Abdeckung 1 öffnen 2 2 Schrauben 2 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 3 des Einschubs OPT2 ent fernen Installare il Dual FAX Fare riferimento alla pagina 1 per le parti in dot azione Rimozione del cop...

Page 830: ...ornillos 2 y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT2 3 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Fin isher installiert ist 1 Die Abdeckung 1 entfernen 2 2 Schrauben 2 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 3 des Einschubs OPT2 ent fernen Rimozione del coperchio vano Per MFP a velocità alta e quando la finitrice è installata 1 Rimuovere il coperchio 1 2 Rimuovere l...

Page 831: ...ueta 4 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 3 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 2 ausgebauten Schrauben 2 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetzen...

Page 832: ... asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 5 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse 4 Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe C anbringen Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar ungül tig Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons zu verhindern Bei 12...

Page 833: ...odelos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 5 Telefonmodulkabel 6 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 5 Inserire il cavo conn...

Page 834: ... finalizador está instalado 8 Vuelva a instalar la cubierta 1 Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6 Die Abdeckungen 7 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen 7 Die Abdeckungen 7 wieder anbringen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 8 Die Abdeckung 1 schließen Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Finisher installiert ist 8 Die Abdeckung...

Page 835: ...terplatte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte nur in OPT1 oder sowohl in OPT1 als auch in OPT2 installiert worden ist um alle FAX Leiterplatten zu initialisie ren Wartungsmodus U600 ausführen um die Faxsteuerbaugruppe zu initialisieren 3 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist um die FAX Leiter platte in OPT2 zu...

Page 836: ...2011 ...

Page 837: ...2011 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for TASKalfa 3500i

imageRUNNER 5075

Brand: Canon Pages: 250

Brand: Samsung Pages: 199

Brand: FujiFilm Pages: 37

Brand: Oki Pages: 20

DRYPRO Model 793

Brand: Konica Minolta Pages: 156

Brand: Oki Pages: 180

Brand: Oki Pages: 137

Brand: Avery Dennison Pages: 68

Brand: Compaq Pages: 238

Brand: Ricoh Pages: 70

Artisan 810 Series

Brand: Epson Pages: 36

Brand: Epson Pages: 2

Brand: Epson Pages: 68

Artisan 810 Series

Brand: Epson Pages: 2

Artisan 810 Series

Brand: Epson Pages: 76

C11CA40201 - WorkForce 500 Color Inkjet

Brand: Epson Pages: 2

Brand: Honeywell Pages: 8

Brand: Honeywell Pages: 58

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands